JP6260015B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine.

  As a gaming machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and the game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a prize game medium such as a predetermined number of prize balls is obtained. Some are given to players. In addition, a variable display device is provided that can variably display identification information (also referred to as “variation”) when a game medium wins in a predetermined winning area (start winning opening) (start condition is established). There are some which are configured to be able to be controlled to an advantageous state such as a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result.

  In addition, as a gaming machine as described above, for example, a time reduction control unit that executes time reduction control for a predetermined number of time reductions is provided, and sudden probability change (surprise) is established when the time reduction control is being executed. There is a gaming machine that performs a rewind effect and notifies the recovery of the number of time reductions (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-259890 A

  However, in the technique described in Patent Document 1, for example, when recovering the number of time reductions that are the remaining number of advantageous states, the establishment of sudden probability change is notified in the same effect manner regardless of the remaining number of time reductions. For this reason, it is monotonous and may reduce the interest of the player. In this way, the establishment of the condition cannot be notified according to the remaining number of advantageous states, and the interest of the player may be reduced.

  This invention is made in view of said point, and makes it a subject to provide the game machine which can alert | report establishment of conditions according to the remaining frequency | count of an advantageous state.

(1) The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and a gaming machine which is one embodiment of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine 1000, or the like). ) And conditions (for example, 16R winning change, 2R winning change (surprise) winning, big bonus winning, regular bonus winning, ART etc. (eg RT, AT, ART, etc.) winning, ART etc. Based on the establishment of a highly accurate state (self-releasing zone), recovery of the number of times such as ART (winning the number of games), reaching the ceiling game (game number cancellation), etc., a predetermined number of special states ( For example, special state control means for controlling to a probability change state, a short time state, a gaming state such as ART, a high probability state such as ART, etc., and an advantageous state (for example, reach state, jackpot gaming state, big A plurality of notification effects (for example, reach (tempered) sashing gasses) for notifying whether or not the game is controlled by an eggplant game state, a regular bonus game state, a game state of recovery of the number of times such as ART, a game state after reaching the ceiling game, etc. Non-reach loss production including production, reach loss production, non-reach production, production per reach, gaming state such as ART, highly accurate state such as ART, gaming state where the number of times recovered such as ART, gaming state after reaching the ceiling game, etc. Notification effect execution means for executing any one of the effects for notifying the transition, etc., and as the advantageous state, the first advantageous state (for example, 2R probability change (surprise) winning, regular bonus winning, etc.) ) And a second advantageous state (for example, winning of 16R probability variation, 2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion) having a larger added value (for example, appearance ball) than the first advantageous state. Wherein winning, a winning etc.) and big bonus, the notification effect execution means, the remaining number of times a specific number of special conditions (for example, if it is controlled to the first preferred state when less than the remaining 50 times) , A first notification effect for notifying that it is not controlled to be in an advantageous state (for example, reach (tempe pie) scooping effect, reach loss effect, effect for notifying the establishment of bonus, notification of failure of high-definition state such as ART or ART, etc. After performing the performance etc., a notification for informing that the second notification effect (for example, 2R probability change (surprise) has been established) or a regular bonus has been established. When the remaining number of special states is greater than or equal to a specific number of times (for example, the remaining 50 times), the first notification effect is displayed. The second notification effect is executed without being executed, and the ratio of which first notification effect is executed before the second notification effect is executed is varied according to the remaining number of special states. This is a gaming machine.
(1A) Further, according to one aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine described in the above (1), a determination unit that determines whether or not the advantageous state is controlled before the advantageous state is controlled (for example, , The start winning determination process in step S101) and the notice effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the notice effect execution means 120 based on the determination by the determination means). With reference to the reading preview buffer 194D, an effect control pattern is set as a usage pattern based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the variable display, and an effect corresponding to the announcement effect For example, a process of setting a control pattern as a usage pattern).
According to such a configuration, the interest of the player can be improved.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can execute a notification effect for notifying establishment of a condition for achieving an advantageous state in accordance with the remaining number of advantageous states, so that it is possible to improve interest.

(2) Further, according to one aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine described in the above (1), the condition includes a plurality of types (for example, 16R probability variation) having different added values (for example, a game ball) obtained after establishment. Win, 2R chance change (surprise) win, 2R chance change → 16R chance change (promotion) win, big bonus win, regular bonus win, etc., and advantageous status (eg, probabilistic status, short-time status, ART, etc.) Condition, high accuracy state such as ART, gaming state of recovery of the number of times such as ART, etc., and a condition with a small value to be obtained after establishment (eg, 2R probability change (surprise) win, regular When the bonus is won), the remaining number of advantageous states may be reset.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can improve the interest of the player even when a condition with small added value (out of play) is satisfied.

(3) Further, according to one aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine described in the above (1) or (2), when the notification effect executing means is less than when the remaining number of advantageous states is large, You may make it the ratio which performs the said notification effect (for example, a 1st notification effect, a 2nd notification effect, etc.) in the late timing in the variable display of identification information becoming high.

  For example, when the remaining number of advantageous states is large (when the remaining number of advantageous states is greater than or equal to a specific number), for example, the remaining number of advantageous states is greater than or equal to a specific number, In the setting in the case of 2, 3 (setting by C-TBL2B shown in FIG. 17B (B)), the non-reach fluctuation categories “PA1” and “PA2” are selected, but the remaining number of advantageous states is small. (When the remaining number of advantageous states is less than a specific number), for example, the setting when the remaining number of advantageous states is greater than or equal to the specific number, the special figure display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories is two or three ( In the setting by C-TBL2C shown in FIG. 17C (B), the notification effect is generated at a later timing during the variable display of the identification information because the variation time is longer than the non-reach variation categories “PA1” and “PA2”. Reach varying categories to perform "PA3", "PA4", the percentage of "PA5" is selected is high (FIG. 16, FIG. 17B (B), FIG. 17C (B), FIG. 5A).

  Also, for example, when the remaining number of advantageous states is large (when the remaining number of advantageous states is greater than or equal to a specific number), for example, the remaining number of advantageous states is greater than or equal to a specific number and ) And when the number of reserved memories is 2, 3 (setting by C-TBL 5B shown in FIG. 17B (E)), the non-reach fluctuation category “PC2” is selected, while the remaining number of advantageous states Is small (when the remaining number of advantageous states is less than the specific number), for example, the remaining number of advantageous states is equal to or greater than the specific number, the special figure display result is 2R probability change (surprising accuracy), and the number of stored memories is 2, 3 In the case of the setting (setting by C-TBL 25C shown in FIG. 17C (E)), the variation time is longer than that of the non-reach variation category “PC2,” and the notification is made at a later timing during the variable display of the identification information. The percentage of selection of the reach variation categories “PC3”, “PC4”, and “PC5” for executing the output is high (FIG. 16, FIG. 17B (E), FIG. 17C (E), FIG. 5A, FIG. 5C). .

  Also, for example, when the remaining number of advantageous states is large (when the remaining number of advantageous states is greater than or equal to a specific number), for example, the remaining number of advantageous states is greater than or equal to a specific number and ) And the setting when the number of reserved memories is 2 or 3 (the setting of the variation pattern when the variation category “PC2” is selected in the setting by the C-TBL 5B shown in FIG. 17B (E)) (in FIG. 20B (I)) In the setting of the fluctuation pattern determination table shown))), the ratio of the non-reach fluctuation pattern “PC2-1” being selected is 30%, and the non-reach fluctuation patterns “PC2-2” and “PC2” having a longer fluctuation time than that. -3 ”is selected at 70% (“ PC2-2 ”40%,“ PC2-3 ”30%), while the remaining number of advantageous states is small (the remaining number of advantageous states is special When the remaining number of advantageous states is equal to or greater than a specific number, the special figure display result is 2R probability change (surprise), and the number of reserved memories is 2, 3 as an example (FIG. 17C (E) When the variation category “PC2” is selected in the setting by the C-TBL 5C shown in FIG. 5B (the setting by the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20C (I)), the non-reach variation pattern “PC2-1”. Is 20%, and the non-reach variation pattern “PC2-2” or “PC2-3” having a longer variation time is 80% (“PC2-2” 60%, “PC2-3” 20%), the rate of selection of the variation pattern for executing the notification effect at a late timing during the variable display of the identification information is high. In other words, it is set so that the notification effect is executed at a later timing when the remaining number of advantageous states is large (for example, when it is equal to or greater than the specific number) (for example, when it is less than the specific number). May be.

  That is, in each variation pattern, the notification effect is executed toward the end of the special figure variation time (the final stage). Therefore, when the remaining number of advantageous states is small, it is more than when the remaining number of advantageous states is large. However, the notification effect is executed at a late timing.

  Also, when the special figure fluctuation time is the same, but the execution timing of the notification effect is different, prepare a different one, and when the remaining number of advantageous states is large (for example, when it is more than a specific number of times) (for example, It may be set so that the variation pattern in which the notification effect is executed at a later timing is selected. For example, in the variation pattern “PC5-4” belonging to the variation category “PC5” shown in FIG. 5C, the notification effect is executed when the variation pattern “PC5-4-1” is 50000 ms, and the variation pattern “PC5-4-2” is displayed. ”Prepares fluctuation patterns“ PC5-4-1 ”and“ PC5-4-2 ”, both of which the special figure fluctuation time for executing the notification effect at 72000 ms is 76000 ms, and the remaining number of advantageous states Accordingly, the rate at which the variation pattern “PC5-4-2” is selected may be set to be higher when the number of remaining advantageous states is larger than when the remaining number of advantageous states is large.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can focus attention on the variable display until the timing of the variable display when the remaining number of advantageous states is small, and can improve the interest.

(4) In addition, according to one aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3), the notification effect executing unit may determine that the remaining number of advantageous states is a specific number of times (for example, When the condition (for example, 16R probability change) having a large value to be obtained after the establishment is satisfied when the number of times is equal to or greater than (the remaining 50 times) is satisfied (for example, the remaining number of times of the initially set advantageous state is 70 times. When the remaining number of states is 55 times, etc., the first notification effect (for example, reach (tempered) scooping effect, reach loss effect, effect of notifying the absence of bonus, high accuracy state such as ART or ART, etc.) The notification effect for notifying that the second notification effect (for example, 2R probability change (surprise)) has been established, the notification effect for notifying that the regular bonus has been established, etc. without performing the effect of notifying the failure, etc. When the remaining number of advantageous states is less than a specific number (for example, 50 remaining) (for example, the initial number of remaining advantageous states is 70 and the remaining number of advantageous states is 36 When the above-mentioned condition (eg, 2R probability change (surprise) win, regular bonus win, etc.) that is obtained after being established is established, the second notification effect is executed and then the second notification effect is executed. A notification effect may be executed.

  For example, when the remaining number of advantageous states is equal to or greater than a specific number of times, for example, when a condition such as 16R probability change is satisfied, the remaining number of advantageous states is equal to or greater than a specific number, Is set to 2 or 3 (setting of variation pattern when any of variation categories “PB3”, “PB4”, “PB5” is selected in the setting by C-TBL4B shown in FIG. 17B (D)) 20B (F) to FIG. 20B (H) are set according to the variation pattern determination table), the variation pattern per non-reach does not exist, and as in the setting examples of FIG. 20B (F) to FIG. 20B (H). A variation pattern is selected from any one of a plurality of reach variation patterns, that is, when a 16R probability variation is established, a reach (tempe) squeezing performance is performed. , Without performing such Richihazure effect, after performing the reach demonstration, 16R probability variation is variation pattern for notifying that it has established is selected.

  On the other hand, when the remaining number of advantageous states is less than the specific number, for example, the remaining number of advantageous states is equal to or greater than the specific number, the special figure display result is 2R probability change (surprise), and the number of reserved memories is 2, 3 (The change pattern setting when the change category “PC2” is selected in the setting by C-TBL 5C shown in FIG. 17C (E) (by the change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20C (I) and FIG. 20C (M)). Setting)) is a non-reach variation pattern such as non-reach variation patterns “PC2-1” to “PC2-3” or “PD2-1” to “PD2-3”, and the reach (tempe) biting gas After performing the production and reach loss production, it is notified that 2R probability variation (surprising accuracy) or 2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion), which is smaller than the added value obtained by 16R probability variation, has been established. Fluctuation pattern is adapted to be selected that.

  That is, when the condition with a large added value is satisfied when the remaining number of advantageous states is equal to or greater than the specific number, the second notification effect is executed without executing the first notification effect, and the remaining number of advantageous states is When the condition of low value added is satisfied when the number of times is less than the specific number of times, the second notification effect may be executed after the first notification effect is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can play the game without disappointing the player even when the notification effect that notifies that the remaining number of advantageous states is less than the specific number of times and does not enter the advantageous state is executed. Can maintain the expectation of the elderly.

(5) Further, according to one aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), the above-described conditions (for example, winning of 16R probability variation, winning of 2R probability variation (surprise), etc.) )), At least when a first value (for example, a ball or the like) is given (for example, when a ball is given by a round game of 2R probability change (surprise)), When a second value (for example, a ball) that is more advantageous to the player than the value is given (for example, when a ball is given by a round game of 16R probability variation), the first value is When a third value (for example, an appearance ball) that is more advantageous than the first value is given to the player when it is granted (for example, a 2R probability change (surprise) round game, etc.) (for example, 2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion) round game Etc.), and at least the ratio of the first value and the ratio of the third value are determined by the second notification effect (for example, Depending on which of the first notification effects (for example, reach (tempered) groaning effect, reach loss effect, etc.) is executed before executing the 2R probability change (notification effect for notifying that the probability has been established). May be different.

  For example, when 2R probability change (probability) is established, as shown in the setting examples of FIG. 20B (I) and FIG. The variation pattern “PC2-2”, which is a non-reach variation pattern accompanied with “”, is selected more than the other variation patterns “PC2-1” and “PC2-3” belonging to the same variation category “PC2”. When 2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (elevation) is established, as shown in FIG. 20B (M) and FIG. 20C (M), among the variation patterns per non-reach, the non-reach variation pattern with pseudo continuous variation The variation pattern “PC2-3” is higher than the other variation patterns “PC2-1” and “PC2-2” belonging to the same variation category “PC2”. That is, depending on which first notification effect is executed, the ratio of the first value and the ratio of the third value, that is, the ratio of 2R probability variation and 2R probability variation → 16R probability variation. The rate at which (promotion) is established may be different.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can make the player pay more attention to which first notification effect is executed.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for game counted on the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates a change category and a change pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a change category and a change pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a change category and a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning determination process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start time winning process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game state transition process at the time of a change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game state transition process after a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game state setting process at the time of a change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game state setting process after a big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus.

(Embodiment)
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided in the lower part of the game area of the game board 2. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state as a vertical position and an expanded open state as a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) and a second start winning opening are formed.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter.

  In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening. In this way, the second start winning port as the second start area is in an expanded open state in which game balls easily pass (enter) and in a normally open state in which game balls are difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). To change.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) a first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Note that a winning when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A is referred to as a first starting winning. Further, a winning when a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B is referred to as a second starting winning.

  A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening is detected by the first start opening switch 22A (based on the occurrence of the first start winning combination). Is paid out as a prize ball, and the first special figure display device 4A executes the first special figure game if the first special figure reservation storage number (described later) is equal to or smaller than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a variable display (described later) executed on the image display device 5 (described later) is established.

  Further, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls that have passed (entered) the second starting winning opening are detected by the second starting opening switch 22B (based on the occurrence of the second starting winning prize). If the game ball is paid out as a prize ball and the second special figure holding memory number (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the second special symbol display device 4B executes the second special symbol display device 4B. A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a graphic game (described later) or a variable display of decorative symbols (described later) executed in the image display device 5 is established. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the first start prize and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the second start prize may be the same number or different numbers. Good.

  The first special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not immediately executed at the time of occurrence of the first start winning and are temporarily suspended. Even if the first start condition for executing the variable display game such as the first special figure game (described later) and the decorative symbol variable display (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start winning prize, When the first start condition that permits the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a winning is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that is satisfied first is being executed) If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is put on hold (the variable display game is in a waiting state). That is, the first special figure reserved memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning that is in a waiting state. The number of first special figure hold memory decreases by one every time one first start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the first start condition by a certain first start winning is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the first start winning in which the first start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the first starting winning is not satisfied. Is stored (held) as hold data (first special figure hold information) until a first start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held first special figure hold information is digested one by one every time the first start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the digested first special figure hold information is executed.

  The second special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning) that are not immediately executed when the second start winning occurs but are temporarily suspended. Even if the second start condition for executing the variable display game such as the second special figure game (described later) or the variable display of decorative symbols (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start winning prize, When the second start condition permitting the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a winning is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established earlier is being executed) If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is put on hold (the variable display game is in a waiting state). In other words, the second special figure holding memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning that is in the waiting state for execution. The number of second special figure reservation storage decreases by one every time one second start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the 2nd start condition by a certain 2nd start prize is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd start prize which does not satisfy the 2nd start condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 2nd start prize Is stored (held) as hold data (second special figure hold information) until a second start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the second special figure hold information that has been put on hold is digested one by one every time the second start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the second special figure hold information that is digested is executed.

  In addition, when there is no particular distinction between the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, they are also simply referred to as “start winning opening”. Further, when there is no particular distinction between the first start prize and the second start prize, they are also simply referred to as “start prize”. Further, the reserved memory number obtained by adding the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number is referred to as a “total reserved memory number”. When there is no particular distinction between the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number, and the total reserved memory number, it is usually simply referred to as “special figure reserved memory number”. When it is referred to as “the number of memories”, it may indicate one or two of the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number, and the total reserved memory number. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition” or “execution condition”. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition”. The first special figure hold information and the second special figure hold information are also simply referred to as “special figure hold information” unless otherwise distinguished.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the lower part of the gaming area of the game board 2 (below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B). The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the OFF state, the special prize opening door closes the big winning prize opening, and the game ball passes (enters) the big winning prize opening. Make it impossible. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening and the game ball passes through the big winning opening (entrance). ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes (enters) through the big prize port may be provided.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) a special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, a count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Accordingly, when the special winning ball apparatus 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special winning hole, which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to obtain a prize ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball to the special prize winning port. The second state is more disadvantageous to the person than the first state.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A includes, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A displays (variably displays) a special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be identified. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is “ Also referred to as “second special figure”.

  A game executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, a variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (variable display game for variably displaying the first special symbol) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. (Variable display game for variably displaying the second special figure) is also referred to as a second special figure game. Further, when there is no particular distinction between the first special game and the second special game, they are also simply referred to as “special game”.

  The first special symbol display device 4A (the same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B) has a plurality of types of special symbols such as numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". Variable display of special symbols. Each special symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to the special symbol. As an example, each number indicating “0” to “9” is assigned with a symbol number “0” to “9”, and the symbol indicating “−” is assigned a symbol number “10”. That's fine. Note that the special symbols are not limited to those composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, lighting patterns such as L and E in the alphabet) in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in a 7-segment LED are set in advance, as a special design It may be displayed.

  A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2 (upper portions of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B). Yes. The first hold indicator 25A includes, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the first special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the first special figure game) based on the hold data (first special figure hold information). A first on-hold display is displayed for possible display. For example, the first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, when the number of holdings of the first special figure game increases by 1 due to the establishment of the new first start condition, the number of lighting is increased by one, and the establishment of the first first special condition causes the first special figure game to When the number of holdings is decreased by 1, the number of lighting may be decreased by 1.

  The second hold indicator 25B includes, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the second special figure game) based on the hold data (second special figure hold information). A second on-hold display is displayed for possible display. For example, the second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of holdings of the second special figure game increases by 1 due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the number of lighting is increased by one, and the establishment of the second second start condition satisfies the second special figure game. When the number of holdings is decreased by 1, the number of lighting may be decreased by 1.

  On the left side of the game area on the game board 2, a passing gate 41, a normal symbol display device 20, and a general figure hold display device 25 C are provided. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, if the number of common figure reservations (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit (eg, “4”), the normal symbol display 20 A normal start condition for executing a general game (to be described later) executed at the above is established.

  The normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The normal symbol display 20 displays (variably displays) variable symbols of ordinary symbols (also referred to as “ordinary symbols” or “ordinary symbols”), which are a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Note that a variable display game that variably displays a normal symbol is also referred to as a general game (or “normal game”). Note that information about a general game in which a general chart start condition is satisfied but a general chart start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (held) as on-hold data (general map hold information).

  The general figure hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general figure hold storage number based on the hold data (general hold information) by, for example, the number of LEDs to be lit. The number of stored customary figures is the number of usual-purpose games that are temporarily executed without being executed immediately when a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Even if the general chart start condition for executing the general game is satisfied by the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 21, the general chart start condition for allowing the start of the general game is not satisfied ( For example, if the previously established ordinary game is being executed), the execution of the ordinary game is put on hold (the ordinary game is waiting to be executed). In other words, the number of usual-pending memories is the number of usual-purpose games that are in a waiting state. The number of stored ordinary maps is decremented by 1 each time one of the ordinary diagram start conditions is satisfied.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol display area is arranged. In the decorative symbol display area, decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified, are variably displayed. Variable display of decoration identification information (decorative symbols) is also included in the variable display game. The image display device 5 is a first special symbol game (a special game using the first special symbol) executed by the first special symbol display device 4A or a second special symbol executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the game (special game using the second special diagram), variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols is executed in the display area (decorative symbol display area).

  As an example, as shown in FIG. 1, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. Corresponding to the start of any special figure game of the first special figure game or the second special figure game, that is, corresponding to the start of the fluctuation of any special figure of the first special figure or the second special figure game Then, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the decorative symbol variation (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. Thereafter, in response to the end of the special figure game, that is, in response to the stop display of the special figure, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols (determined decorative symbols, final symbols) that are variable display results are displayed. Stop symbol) is also displayed. That is, in the display area (decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R) of the image display device 5, the variation of the ornamental symbol is started in conjunction with (corresponding to) the first special symbol game (or the second special symbol game). Then, the fixed decoration symbol (also referred to as the final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed.

  For example, there are eight kinds of decorative patterns (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8”, Chinese numerals, English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters, symbols, and character images. The character image may be composed of, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure). Each decorative symbol is given a symbol number corresponding to each decorative symbol. As an example, each symbol number “1” to “8” only needs to be given a symbol number “1” to “8”. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  In addition, the stop display which stops the fixed special symbol which is a variable symbol display result (also referred to as a special symbol display result) and terminates the variable display, and the fixed symbol symbol which is a variable symbol display result (final stop) Stop display to stop the variable display and stop display to stop the variable display by stopping display of the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol (also referred to as the normal figure display result) Also referred to as a complete stop display, a final stop display, or a derived display (or simply “derived”). Note that the decorative pattern variation start timing and variation end timing do not necessarily coincide with the special symbol variation start timing and variation end timing, and within the special symbol variation time (special symbol variation time), As long as the fluctuation time is within.

  In other words, the variation start timing of the decorative symbol may be later than the variation start timing of the special symbol, or the variation end timing of the special symbol (stop display timing of the confirmed special symbol) It may be later than (stop display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the display of the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped, and the final special symbol may be stopped and displayed when the execution of the predetermined effect is completed. An example of the predetermined effect is a simple hold effect (described later) which is an aspect of the hold effect (described later).

  Further, a stop display different from the complete stop display (final stop display, derived display) may be performed. For example, the decorative design may be temporarily stopped during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative design until the fixed decorative design is derived and displayed. In the temporary stop display, a decorative pattern with a fluctuation speed of “0” is displayed while being stopped, for example, causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction, or shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). This includes things that stop and display without causing time, slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  In addition, in the display area of the image display device 5, a first start prize storage display area 5HL and a second start prize storage display area 5HR are arranged. In the first start winning memory display area 5HL, as in the first hold indicator 25A, the first hold display for displaying the first special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner is performed. That is, the number of the first special figure games that are currently suspended is displayed in an identifiable manner. In the first start winning memory display area 5HL, as in the second hold indicator 25B, the second hold display for displaying the second special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner is performed. In other words, the number of second special figure games that are currently suspended is displayed in an identifiable manner.

  In the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the first hold display may be performed, for example, right-justified. In other words, when the number of holds of the first special figure game increases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, if there is no other first hold display in the first start prize storage display area 5HL, the first start prize storage display A new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented first special figure hold information on the right side of the area 5HL (center side of the display area of the image display device 5), and the first start winning storage display area 5HL If there is another first hold display, the new first hold is displayed on the left side of the other first hold display (the left side of the leftmost first hold display if there are a plurality of other first hold displays). You may make it add a display. In addition, when there are a plurality of first hold indications in the first start winning memory display area 5HL, and the number of holds of the first special figure game decreases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first reduced amount is displayed. Delete the first hold display (the first hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning memory display area 5HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information; Each of the other first hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased first hold display side (right side).

  Further, in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, the second hold display may be performed, for example, left-justified. That is, when the number of second special figure games held increases due to the establishment of a new second start condition, if there is no other second hold display in the second start win memory display area 5HR, the second start win memory display A new second hold display is added to the left side of the area 5HR (the center side of the display area of the image display device 5) as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special figure hold information, and the second start winning storage display area 5HR If there is another second hold display, the new second hold is displayed on the right side of the other second hold display (or on the right side of the rightmost second hold display if there are a plurality of other second hold displays). You may make it add a display.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of second hold indications in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, if the number of holds in the second special figure game is reduced due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second reduced amount is stored. Delete the second hold display (the second hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning memory display area 5HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information; Each of the other second hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side). Note that the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second start prize storage display area 5HR are also simply referred to as “start prize storage display area 5H” unless otherwise distinguished.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, in addition to the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second start-winning memory display area 5HR, the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second as the hold display area. The hold display erased (moved) from the start winning memory display area 5HR (that is, the first special figure hold information digested by the establishment of the first start condition and the second display digested by the establishment of the second start condition) Active display area AHA displaying a special image representing information including active display (also called digestion display, current display) corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols executed based on the special map hold information (Digestion display area, digestion display area, current hold display area, current hold display area, active hold display area, active hold display area, active Display region, this display area, this display area, also referred to as digestion time display.) Is, for example, between a first start winning storage display area 5HL second start winning storage display area 5HR is disposed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the active display area AHA is arranged between the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second start-winning memory display area 5HR. The display area AHA only needs to be arranged at any position in the display area of the image display device 5. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, in addition to the active display, information corresponding to the active display such as an active display frame surrounding the active display, the active display or the periphery of the active display, and characters and images displayed around the active display frame Etc. may be displayed as a special image.

  In addition to the above configuration, the game area of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or plural general winning openings that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered any of the general prize opening is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting the player's operation act on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

  An audio output member is provided in the periphery of the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 8UL and the speaker 8UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and the speaker 8LL and the speaker 8LR are installed at the lower left and right oblique parts of the upper plate (the upper left and right oblique parts of the lower plate). It is installed. Hereinafter, the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR will be simply referred to as speakers 8 unless otherwise distinguished. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) voice (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs a production sound (also referred to as a sound effect) according to the game progress status of the gaming machine 1 and outputs a warning sound according to the status of the gaming machine 1.

  The production sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound, and the like. The music in the production sound is, for example, BGM, a song, etc. that are output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, voice (serif, message), or the like that is output in accordance with a detection result by a switch or a sensor (for example, detection of a winning at the first start winning opening, etc.). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or a voice that is output in response to an operation action on the push button 31B. Since the operation action on the push button 31B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound output in response to the operation action on the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the production sound is, for example, a sound or voice that is notified to request an operation action on the push button 31B, or a sound, voice, or the like that notifies the shift to the reach state when the reach state (described later) is shifted. , Sounds, voices, etc. that give notice or suggestion that the game will shift to the jackpot gaming state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state.

  An example of the warning sound is a warning sound that is output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound that is output when the glass door (not shown) is open, or the like. .

  A light emitting member (light emitting body) that emits light as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the light emitting member 9CC is installed at the upper position of the image display device 5, the light emitting member 9CL and the light emitting member 9CR are installed at the left and right positions of the image display device 5, and the light emitting member is installed at the upper position of the frame 3 for the gaming machine. The light emitting member 9SL and the light emitting member 9SR are installed on the left and right positions of the frame 3 for the gaming machine 9U. Hereinafter, the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, and 9SR are collectively referred to as a lamp 9 unless particularly distinguished. For example, the lamp 9 may be composed of one or more LEDs, or may be composed of a flash lamp. The light emitting member 9U may be a rotating lamp (for example, a patrol lamp) having a rotating portion. In addition to the above, for example, various light emitting members may be installed around each structure (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) in the game area.

  The image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the like described above are rendering devices that perform rendering, but the gaming machine 1 may include other rendering devices such as a rendering model having a drive unit as the rendering device. Good.

  In addition, the arrangement position (installation position) of each component is an example, and may be arranged at other positions. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area. In addition, for example, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the general-purpose hold indicator 25C may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the general symbol display 20 starts the general game based on the fact that the general diagram start condition is satisfied after the general diagram start condition is satisfied. In the regular game, after the variable display of the normal symbol is started (after the change of the normal symbol is started), the fixed normal symbol that becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol after a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses. Is stopped (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of “normal symbol lose” is displayed. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a special game (first special game) is started by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied. A special game (second special game) is started by the second special symbol display device 4B on the basis that the second start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied. In the special figure game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started (after the change of the special symbol is started), when the variable display time as the special figure change time elapses, the fixed special that becomes the variable display result of the special symbol Derives and displays a symbol (special image display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, “ It will be “losing”.
If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the “small hit” as the predetermined display result may be used.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times. Note that, after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the small hit game state may be controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an example, special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, and a special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a jackpot symbol and a lost symbol in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

  After the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a specific symbol in the special game, and the result of the specific display is “big hit”, the big winning door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a predetermined upper limit time in the big hit gaming state. The large winning opening is opened in a period until (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second) elapses or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. Thereby, the round which makes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 the 1st state (open state) advantageous for a player is performed.

  A special prize-winning ball device that receives a game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closes the big prize-winning slot, with the grand prize-winning door that has opened the grand prize-winning port during the round. 7 is changed to a second state (closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player for the first state, and one round is completed. The round that is the opening cycle of the big prize opening can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “16”, etc.). Even before the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the execution of the round may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won a big prize opening). .

  Of the rounds in the big hit gaming state, the round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) advantageous for the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) is normally opened. Also called round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time during which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) is relatively short (for example, 0.1 seconds) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, “8” which are jackpot symbols, “1”, “3” The special symbols indicating the numbers “5” and “7” are the normal open round jackpot symbols, and the special symbols indicating the numbers “2”, “4” and “6” are the short-term open round jackpot symbols. In the big hit game state (normal open big hit state) as the normal open round specific game state controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the big winning opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 The door is in the open state in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) that is the first period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. By doing so, the round which changes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the 1st state (open state) advantageous to a player is performed. The normal open big hit state is also referred to as a first specific game state.

  In the big hit game state (short-term open big hit state) as the short-term open round specific game state controlled after the short-term open round big hit symbol is derived as the final special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is set in each round. A second time period (for example, 0) that the upper limit time for changing to the first state advantageous to the player (the upper limit of the period during which the big prize opening is opened by the big prize opening door) is shorter than the first period in the normal opening big hit state. 1 second). In the short-term open big hit state, the opening period of the big prize opening is controlled to be the second period, and other control is performed in the same manner as the normal open big hit state. Note that the short-term open big hit state may be controlled so that the number of round executions is a second round number (eg, “2”) smaller than the first round number (eg, “16”) in the normal open big hit state. Good.

  In such a short-term open big hit state, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins a big winning opening. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (such as 0.1 second) and is very short. Therefore, the short-term open big hit state is substantially a big hit gaming state in which a ball (prize ball) cannot be obtained. The short-term open big hit state is also called a second specific game state.

  In addition, the jackpot gaming state as the short-term opening round specific gaming state is not limited to the one with a short winning opening period compared to the big hit gaming state as the normal opening round specific gaming state, for example, the opening of the big winning mouth The period (upper limit time) is the same in the short-term open round specific game state and the normal open round specific game state, but in the short-term open round specific game state, there is an upper limit number of times (for example, two times) that makes the big prize opening state open. It may be less than the upper limit number of times (for example, 16 times) in the normal open round specific game state. That is, in the big hit gaming state as the short-term opening round specific gaming state, the period during which the game ball is changed to the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) in each round is longer than the first period in the normal opening round specific gaming state. As long as it is at least one of the short second period and the second round number being less than the first round number in the normal open round specific gaming state. .

  In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R arranged in the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the start of any special figure game of the game, the variable display of decorative symbols is started. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is a specific variable during the period from the start of variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of variable display by the stop display of the confirmed decorative symbol. There may be a predetermined reach state that constitutes a part of the display combination.

  The reach state is a decorative symbol that is not yet stopped when the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination (also referred to as “reach variation symbol”). ) Is a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In the following description, reaching a reach state is also referred to as reach establishment (reach establishment).

  Further, in response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as the display of the character image, the change of the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, and the change of the variation mode of the decorative pattern are referred to as reach effect (or reach effect display). The reach effect includes not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speaker 8 and the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9 and the like before reaching the reach state. It may be included that the operation mode is different from the operation mode.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the production pattern, the possibility that the jackpot combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach production may be varied (also referred to as “hit expectation” or “hit reliability”). As a result, the jackpot expectation can be made different depending on which of a plurality of types of reach effects is executed, that is, depending on which reach effect appears. As an example, in the present embodiment, the reach mode of normal reach and the reach mode of super reach that has a higher degree of expectation of jackpot than normal reach are set (prepared) in advance.

  Note that the degree of expectation of jackpot is, for example, (probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) / {(probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of being the big hit) + (the jackpot (Probability that the effect is executed at times other than time) × (probability of not winning the jackpot)} (when the expectation degree of jackpot is “1”, the variable display result is always “hit”).

  In addition, during the variable display of decorative symbols, as one aspect of the variable display effect, a slip effect or a pseudo-continuous effect realized by a variable display operation such as a decorative symbol can be executed. In the slide effect, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) are displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols at, a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of the decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” decorative symbol display area) in the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols display area 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, or both), the decorative symbol is changed again, and then the stop symbol is displayed, thereby performing the effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed. Thus, in the slide effect, a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed until a fixed decorative symbol resulting in variable display is derived and displayed after variable display of the decorative symbols is started, and then variable for a predetermined number of decorative symbols. By executing the display again, there are a case where the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state and a case where the decorative symbol constituting the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state.

  In the pseudo-continuous production, in response to the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once, the fixed decoration that becomes a variable display result after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. Before the symbols are derived and displayed, all of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, a predetermined pseudo-continuous chance is a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). Or temporarily displayed), in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a re-variable display, which is an effect display for starting variable display of all the decorative symbols, is performed in a predetermined manner. Times (for example, up to 4 times).

  In the present embodiment, the number of re-variable displays (number of re-variable displays) in the pseudo-continuous effect is variable display (first variable) until all the decorative symbols temporarily stop temporarily in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Display) number of times (one time), the number of re-variable display (final variable display) after all decorative symbols have been temporarily stopped (final variable display), and re-variability between the first variable display and the last variable display. The number of times of display X (X is 0 or 1 or more) and the number of times (X + 1) less than the total number of times (X + 2) are grasped. The number of re-variable display times is the same as the number of times that all decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (the number of temporary stops).

  The first variable display to the first temporary stop display are also referred to as the first pseudo-continuous, the second variable display (first re-variable display) to the second temporary stop display are also referred to as the second pseudo-continuous, The third variable display (second revariable display) to the third temporary stop display are also referred to as the third pseudo-ream, and the fourth variable display (third revariable display) to fourth temporary stop display. This is also called the fourth pseudo-ream. In addition, the number of pseudo-continuations in the pseudo-continuous production is also referred to as the number of pseudo-series fluctuations (or the number of pseudo-series). That is, the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations, the number of re-variable display times, and the number of temporary stops are the same. The increase in the number of pseudo-continuations such as the first, second, third,... Is also referred to as “the pseudo-continuation continues”.

  In the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the re-variable display (re-variation) is performed once to four times, so that the decoration pattern is variable based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once. The display can appear as if it were started 2-5 times in a row.

  In the pseudo-continuous effect, before reaching reach in the change (before reaching the reach state), the pseudo-continuous chance eyes are temporarily stopped and displayed in any or all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R may be temporarily stopped, or after the reach is established (after reaching the reach state), the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C All the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped so that the pseudo consecutive chances are temporarily stopped and displayed on any part of 5R. In other words, there are at least an effect mode for temporarily stopping display before reaching the reach state and an effect mode for temporarily stopping the chance symbol after reaching the reach state. Also good. The chance symbol can be stopped and displayed even when the reach state is not reached.

  The slip effect (similar to the pseudo-ream effect) is a notice or suggestion to the player that there is a possibility that any reach effect, or a certain reach effect may be executed, or that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high. May be. Hereinafter, an effect for giving a notice or suggestion to a player that there is a possibility that any reach effect or a certain reach effect may be executed or that the degree of expectation of jackpot is high may be collectively referred to as a notice effect. In addition to the slide effect and the pseudo-continuous effect, the notice effect may use a variable display operation different from the slide effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. For example, a background image display or a message window display There may be those that use an effect operation different from the variable display effect, such as hold display, audio output, and light emission (lighting, blinking, extinguishing).

  The notice effect may be executed (started) before the player can determine (actually confirm) whether the notice effect or the content suggested by the notice effect is realized. For example, a notice effect that notifies or suggests to a player that the variable display state of a decorative pattern due to winning of a certain game ball may become a reach state has at least a variable display state of the decorative pattern due to winning of the game ball. What is necessary is just to be executed (started) before entering the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, the notice effect that notifies or suggests to the player that the variable display result due to winning of a certain game ball may be a “hit” is because at least the confirmed decorative pattern due to winning of the game ball is stopped and displayed May be executed (started) before.

  The notice effect may include a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as “pre-determined notice effect”). The pre-reading notice effect determines whether or not the variable display result is a “big hit” based on the hold information of the special game before starting the variable display subject to the notice. (Prefetching) is a notice effect to be executed based on the determination result. In the following description, the hold information that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is referred to as target hold information, and the first hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target first hold display and corresponds to the target hold information. The second hold display to be performed is referred to as a target second hold display, and the variable display corresponding to the target hold information is also referred to as a target variable display. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect is executed during the digestion of the target hold information (when the target hold information including the variable display of the target is being digested) and before the target hold information. There are a case where it is executed during digestion of the hold information and a case where it is executed during digestion of the hold information of the target and during the digestion of the hold information before the target hold information.

  The stage action that becomes a pre-reading notice effect by winning a certain game ball is that the player determines whether or not the content of the pre-reading notice effect is realized after winning the game ball (after the start condition is established). It may be executed (started) before it can be determined. For example, a stage action that is a pre-reading advance notice for informing (indicating) to a player that there is a possibility of reaching a reach state due to a winning of a certain game ball is at least a decorative pattern by winning of the game ball. Any variable display state may be executed (started) before the reach state (or non-reach state) is reached. In addition, at least a play operation of a pre-reading notice effect for informing (suggesting) a player that a variable display result may be a “hit” by winning a game ball What is necessary is just to be executed (started) before the winning decorative symbol by winning is stopped and displayed.

  Note that the pre-reading notice effect (preliminary notice notice effect) includes, for example, a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the first hold display in the first start prize storage display area 5HL, and the first start prize storage display area 5HL. Action effects such as a hold change change effect that does not change the display mode of the first hold display may be prepared. In addition, in the pre-reading notice effect (preliminary notice effect), for example, a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the second hold display in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, or the second start win memory display area 5HR Action effects such as a hold change change effect that does not change the display mode of the second hold display may be prepared.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is not changed to the reach state after the variable symbol variable display is started. In addition, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is reached after the variable symbol variable display starts. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  In the present embodiment, special symbols (special symbols indicating numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”) that are normally open round jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed as finalized special symbols in the special symbol game. In the case of “big hit”, “16 rounds probable big hit (also referred to as“ 16R probable change ”)” is displayed, and the special symbol (special symbol indicating the number of “5”) that becomes the short-term open round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In the case of “big hit”, “2 round probability variation big hit (also referred to as“ 2R probability variation ”,“ surprise accuracy ”,“ 2R probability variation (surprise accuracy) ”)”. “16R probability variation” and “2R probability variation (crash probability)” are referred to as big hit types.

  When a special symbol (a special symbol indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”) that is a normal opening round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, In other words, in the case of 16R probability change, after the predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state, the definite decoration that becomes a jackpot combination corresponding to 16R probability change. The symbol is stopped and displayed. An example of the jackpot combination corresponding to 16R probability variation is that three decorative symbols with odd symbol numbers are arranged on a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight line horizontally) formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. (I.e. "1", "1", "1" lined up, "3", "3", lined up with "3", lined up with "5", "5", "5" , “7”, “7”, “7”, etc.).

  When a special symbol (a special symbol indicating the numbers “2”, “4”, “6”) that becomes a short-term opening round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, that is, 2R probability change In the case of (accuracy), after the predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being reached, or after reaching the reach state, the 2R probability change (accuracy) ), The fixed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination corresponding to the symbol is stopped and displayed. An example of a jackpot combination corresponding to 2R probability change (probability) is that a decorative symbol having an even symbol number is on a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight line on the side) formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. 3 lines (ie, “2”, “2”, “2”, “4”, “4”, “4”, “6”, “6”, “6” ”) Or a combination of decorative symbols including, for example, a chance symbol (for example, a combination of“ 1 ”,“ accuracy ”, and“ 2 ”.“ Accuracy ”is an example of a chance symbol).

  When a short-term open round jackpot symbol such as a special symbol indicating “2”, “4”, or “6” is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is the reach state. Instead, as a chance of opening (also referred to as “special appearance”), one of a plurality of predetermined combinations of fixed decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed. In addition, in response to the fact that the variable display state of the decorative symbol has reached the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed, for example, after a predetermined reach effect is executed.

  In addition, when a special symbol that is a short-term opening round jackpot symbol (a special symbol indicating the number “8”) is finally stopped and displayed as a final special symbol in the special symbol game, the short-term opening round jackpot symbol is first derived. After being controlled to the big hit gaming state (short-term open big hit state) as the short-term open round specific gaming state controlled after being played, the big hit gaming state (normally open big hit state) as the normal open round specific gaming state in the same way as 16R probability change Controlled by a jump-up bonus to control. In other words, the jump-up bonus is controlled to 2 rounds of short-term open big hit state in the same way as 2R probability change (surprise accuracy), and then controlled to 14 rounds of normal open big hit gaming state in the same way as 16R probability change, and 2 rounds of short-term release. It is a big hit gaming state constituted by a big hit state and a 14-round normally open big hit state, which is a big hit gaming state in which an added value (out) is less than 16R probability change and greater than 2R probability change (surprise).

  Such a big hit gaming state is also called a jump-up bonus or 2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion), and is called a big hit type together with “16R probability change” and “2R probability change (surprise)”.

  In other words, when a special symbol (a special symbol indicating the number “8”) that is a short-term open round jackpot symbol is displayed as a final special symbol in the special symbol game, the appearance is suitable for 2R probability change (surprising). After the round game is executed in the production mode, the game is controlled to the big hit game state in which the added value (outlet) equivalent to the 16R probability change is obtained.

  In such a big hit game state, a predetermined number (for example, 15) can be obtained if a game ball wins a big winning opening after controlling to a big hit game state (short-term open big hit state) where a lot of balls cannot be obtained or where there are few balls. Players), even if it is a big hit with a small value added (out), it is controlled by the big hit game state (normally open big hit state) with a lot of balls. Can prevent a decrease in interest.

  In the case of 2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion), after a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state, or after the reach state is not reached. 2D probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion) The definite decorative symbol which becomes the big hit combination corresponding to stop is displayed. An example of a jackpot combination corresponding to 2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion) is, for example, a symbol number “ This is a combination of three decorative symbols indicating 8 ”(that is, those aligned with“ 8 ”,“ 8 ”,“ 8 ”) and decorative symbols including a chance symbol.

  When special symbols (special symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7”) that are normally open round jackpot symbols in the special game are displayed at the final stop, There may be a case where the decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot combination corresponding to is finally stopped, or the decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot combination corresponding to 2R probability variation is stopped and displayed on the surface.

  Based on the fact that the special symbol that becomes the normal opening round big hit symbol is stopped, that is, “16R probability change”, it is controlled to the normal opening big hit state, and after that, time reduction control (time reduction control) At the same time, probability variation control (probability variation control) may be performed. By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” in each special figure game is improved to be higher than that in the normal state. The probability variation control based on “16R probability variation” is performed when a special-purpose game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, ST 70 times (70 times probability variation)) after the jackpot gaming state ends, and the variable display result is “ The probability variation control ends when any of the conditions is satisfied first among the cases of “big hit”.

  In addition, by performing the time-saving control, the special symbol variable display time (special symbol variation time) in the special symbol game is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state that is different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, an initialization process after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed) The same control as in the state in which is executed. The time-saving control based on “16R probability change” means that a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times a time) after the big hit gaming state is finished, and the variable display result is “big hit”. The process ends when any of the conditions is established first.

  In addition, based on the fact that the special symbol that becomes the short-term round big hit symbol is stopped, that is, “2R probability change (surprise)”, it is controlled to the short-term open big hit state, and after that, time reduction control Stochastic variation control (probability variation control) may be performed together with (time reduction control). By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” in each special figure game is improved to be higher than that in the normal state. The probability variation control based on “2R probability variation (surprise probability)” is variable when a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, ST (probability variation) (ST70 times)) after the end of the big hit gaming state. The probability variation control is terminated when any one of the conditions is satisfied first when the display result is “big hit”.

  In addition, by performing the time-saving control, the special symbol variable display time (special symbol variation time) in the special symbol game is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state that is different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, an initialization process after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed) The same control as in the state in which is executed. The time-saving control based on the fact that “2R probability change (surprise accuracy)” is achieved is that a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times shorter) after the big hit gaming state ends, and the variable display result is “big hit”. The process ends when any of the conditions is established first.

  Further, after the special symbol indicating “8” is stopped and displayed, that is, “2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion)”, after being controlled to the short-term open big hit state, the normal open big hit state After the completion, probability variation control (probability variation control) may be performed together with time reduction control (time reduction control). By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” in each special figure game is improved to be higher than that in the normal state. The probability variation control based on “2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion)” is performed when a special game of a predetermined number of times (for example, ST (probability variation) (ST70 times)) is executed after the big hit gaming state ends. Then, when any of the conditions is satisfied first among the cases where the variable display result is “big hit”, the probability variation control ends.

  In addition, by performing the time-saving control, the special symbol variable display time (special symbol variation time) in the special symbol game is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state that is different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, an initialization process after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed) The same control as in the state in which is executed. The time-saving control based on “2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion)” means that a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times short) after the big hit gaming state is finished, and the variable display result is The process ends when any of the conditions of “big hit” is satisfied first.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, either the normal open big hit state or the short-term open big hit state based on the fact that “16R certainty change”, “2R certainty change (surprise)”, “2R certainty change → 16R certainty change (promotion)”. Either or both of them are controlled, and after that, probability variation control (probability change control) is performed together with time reduction control (time reduction control). In the following description, a state controlled by one or both of the time reduction control and the probability variation control may be referred to as an advantageous state.

  In addition, even if the probability variation control is ended when the probability variation control is ended by the probability variation control lottery executed every time the special game is started after the big hit game state is finished, the probability variation control is terminated. Good. In such a mode, the probability variation falling lottery is not performed until the special figure game reaches the predetermined number of games, and the probability variation falling lottery is performed in each game after the special figure game has reached the predetermined number of games. It may be. The same applies to the time reduction control. Note that the “predetermined number of games” is not limited to “70 times” described above, but may be “50 times” or “100 times”, or may be one of a plurality of types.

  When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display unit 20 uses the normal symbol display unit 20 to make the normal symbol change time (normal symbol change time) shorter than that in the normal state, or to change the normal symbol in each time the normal symbol game. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state, and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied. In this way, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in accordance with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the variable display result Is reduced to become a “big hit”. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

  A gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state or a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a high probability high base state. The probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the short time control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is sometimes referred to as a “probability variation state”, and may be referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from the high probability low base state. On the other hand, a probability variation state (high probability low base state) in which only time variation control is performed and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed is sometimes referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from a high accuracy high base state. The short time state in which the short time control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low probability high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time reduction control, nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of the time reduction control and the probability change control is performed in a game state other than the normal state, the special game (second special game) can be frequently executed, and each special game (first special game) The probability that the variable display result in the figure game or the second special figure game will be a “big hit” is increased, which is advantageous to the player. A gaming state advantageous to a player different from the big hit gaming state is also referred to as a special gaming state.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed for a decorative pattern. For example, as a re-lottery effect, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, after temporarily displaying a decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination corresponding to 2R probability change (probability), again with the same decorative symbol aligned A decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination that corresponds to 16R probability variation, a decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination corresponding to 2R probability variation (surprise), and a decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination corresponding to 2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion) Any one of them may be finally stopped and displayed as a confirmed decorative symbol.

  In addition, after a decisive decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination corresponding to 2R probability change (surprise probability) or 2R probability change is derived and displayed, either at the start of the big hit gaming state, during the round in the big hit gaming state, or in the big hit gaming state Control from the end of one round to the start of the next round, the period from the end of the last round in the jackpot game state to the start of the next variable display game, etc. A jackpot promotion effect may be executed as a probability change notification effect of whether or not to do. Note that a notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the final round in the jackpot game state is particularly called “ending promotion effect”.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp. Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical component for rendering such as 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 is an electrical component for effects such as display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speaker 8, and all or part of the on / off operation in the lamp 9. Is provided with a function of determining the control content for causing a predetermined performance operation to be executed.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speaker 8 based on a command, control data, etc. from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and performs lighting / extinguishing driving in the lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. The lamp driver circuit to perform is installed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. If it is. In addition to the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, the gaming machine 1 similarly has other switches (for example, a glass door (not shown) connected to the main board 11. ), A switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting unauthorized vibrations, and a switch for detecting unauthorized electromagnetic waves. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command that specifies the start of change in the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol variably displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, whether the variable display result is “lost”, “16R certain change”, “2R certain change (surprise)” or “2R certain change → 16R”. Different EXT data is set according to the determination result of “probable change (promotion)” or the determination result of the jackpot type.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating a final stop symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the big winning opening is opened to notify that the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state. Command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening of the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “16”) in the normal opening big hit state or the short-term opening big hit state. Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the first start prize is generated when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start prize port formed by the normal prize ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. This is a first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the first special figure game by the symbol display device 4A is satisfied.

  The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and the second start winning is generated. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B is established.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number so that the first special figure reserved memory number can be specified in the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the like. . The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in the second start winning memory display area 5HR or the like.

  For example, the command transmitted as the on-hold storage information may be a first start opening prize specifying command or a second starting opening prize specifying that specifies whether a start winning is made at the first starting winning opening or a starting winning is made at the second starting winning opening. A command is transmitted, and a first reserved memory number notification command and a second reserved memory number notification command for specifying the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number are transmitted. It should be noted that when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second one) indicating that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory count decreases, the reserved memory count addition designation command (the second reserved figure count designation command) indicates that the first special figure reserved memory count or the second special figure reserved memory count has decreased. 1 reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Instead of the first pending storage number notification command and the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the total pending storage number may be transmitted. Further, a total pending storage number addition designation command (total pending storage number subtraction designation command) for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be transmitted.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating the determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” and the determination result of the big hit type as the winning determination result. The command C6XXH is a variation category command that indicates a determination result of a variation category (also referred to as “variation pattern type”) as a winning determination result. The variation category is a name when the variation patterns of decorative symbols are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including a variation pattern of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

  In the present embodiment, in the winning random number determination process (see FIG. 15A), the variable display result is determined as “big hit” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result when the start winning is generated. If it is determined to be “big hit”, the type of jackpot is determined based on the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the variation category is determined based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation category (Variation pattern type) is determined. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command and the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 can recognize whether or not the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” based on the value set in the symbol designation command and the big hit type, The variable category can be recognized based on the value set in the category command.

  The effect control commands such as the change pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are used when the effect control CPU 120 controls one or more effect devices (image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, etc.). . Hereinafter, an effect control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5 is a display control command, an effect control command used for controlling audio output from the speaker 8 is an audio control command, and a light emission operation of the lamp 9 ( The effect control command used for controlling the lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation is also referred to as a lamp control command. Note that, among the effect control commands, there may be a display control command, a voice control command, and a lamp control command.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing the processing and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, on the main board 11 side, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation category, The numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the display result and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

  Next, the decorative pattern variation pattern will be described. Hereinafter, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” is referred to as “losing variation pattern”. The loss variation pattern includes a “non-reach variation pattern” (“non-reach loss variation pattern”, “non-reach” corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “loss”. (Also referred to as “losing variation pattern”) or “reach variation pattern” (“reach (losing)”) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”. "Also referred to as" variation pattern ").

  A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as “hit variation pattern”. The hit fluctuation pattern includes a “big hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and a “small hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit”. Also good. As the big hit variation pattern, a plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each of the big hit types may be prepared.

  Non-reach variation patterns are prepared for multiple variation patterns with different variation times, corresponding to time-short control executed when the total number of reserved memories is large, or when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state or the short-time state. Good. As a result, by selecting one of the variation patterns according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state, it is possible to control to shorten the variation time according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state.

  For variation patterns including a reach effect such as a big hit variation pattern and a reach variation pattern, a variation pattern corresponding to the reach mode of each reach effect is prepared. Note that the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed is referred to as “normal reach fluctuation pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is executed is referred to as “super reach fluctuation pattern”.

  5A, 5B, and 5C show specific examples of the variation category and the variation pattern in the present embodiment. 5A, 5B, and 5C, the variation category “PA1” is a shortened / non-reach (losing) variation category. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the variation category “PA1”. The fluctuation category “PA2” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3” belong to the variation category “PA2”. The fluctuation category “PA3” is a normal reach (losing) fluctuation category. The variation categories “PA3-1” and “PA3-2” belong to the variation category “PA3”. The fluctuation category “PA4” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-4” belong to the variation category “PA4”. The fluctuation category “PA5” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-4” belong to the variation category “PA5”.

  The variation category “PB3” is a normal reach (16R probability variation) variation category. The variation patterns “PB3-1” and “PB3-2” belong to the variation category “PB3”. The variation category “PB4” is a super reach α (16R probability variation) variation category. Variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-4” belong to the variation category “PB4”. The variation category “PB5” is a super reach β (16R probability variation) variation category. The variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-4” belong to the variation category “PB5”.

  The variation category “PC2” is a non-reach (2R probability variation (surprise)) variation category. Variation patterns “PC2-1” to “PC2-3” belong to the variation category “PC2”. The variation category “PC3” is a normal reach (2R probability variation (surprise)) variation category. Variation patterns “PC3-1” and “PC3-2” belong to the variation category “PC3”. The variation category “PC4” is a super reach α (2R probability variation (surprise)) variation category. The variation patterns “PC4-1” to “PC4-4” belong to the variation category “PC4”. The variation category “PC5” is a super reach β (2R probability variation (surprise)) variation category. Variation patterns “PC5-1” to “PC5-4” belong to the variation category “PC5”.

  The variation category “PD2” is a non-reach (2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion)) variation category. Variation patterns “PD2-1” to “PD2-3” belong to the variation category “PD2”. The variation category “PD3” is a normal reach (2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion)) variation category. The variation patterns “PD3-1” and “PD3-2” belong to the variation category “PD3”. The variation category “PD4” is a super reach α ((2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion)) variation category. The variation patterns “PD4-1” to “PD4-4” belong to the variation category “PD4”. The variation category “PD5” is a super reach β (2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion)) variation category, and variation patterns “PD5-1” to “PD5-4” belong to the variation category “PD5”. ing.

  The variation pattern “PA2-1” belonging to the variation category “PA2” is a non-reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as non-reach (loss). The variation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach variation pattern in which a slip effect is executed. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the slip effect is executed. The same applies to other fluctuation patterns in which a slip effect is executed. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belonging to the variation category “PA1” is a non-reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern “PA2-1”.

The variation pattern “PA3-1” belonging to the variation category “PA3” is a normal reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as a normal reach (loss). Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once.
The variation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (lost) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as the super reach α (lost). The fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a gas.
The fluctuation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (production) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-4” is a super reach α (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PA5-1” belonging to the variation category “PA5” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as the super reach β (loss). The fluctuation pattern “PA5-2” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-3” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-4” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

The variation pattern “PB3-1” belonging to the variation category “PB3” is a normal reach (16R probability variation) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as normal reach (16R probability variation). The variation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (16R probability variation) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once.
The variation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the variation category “PB4” is a super reach α (16R probability variation) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as the super reach α (16R probability variation). The variation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (16R probability variation) variation pattern in which pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a gas. The variation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (16R probability variation) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PB4-4” is a super reach α (16R probability variation) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PB5-1” belonging to the variation category “PB5” is a super reach β (16R probability variation) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as super reach β (16R probability variation). The variation pattern “PB5-2” is a super reach β (16R probability variation) variation pattern in which pseudo-continuous variation (production) is executed as a gas. The variation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (16R probability variation) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PB5-4” is a super reach β (16R probability variation) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PC2-1” belonging to the variation category “PC2” is a non-reach (2R probability variation (surprise)) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as non-reach (2R probability variation (surprise accuracy)). . The variation pattern “PC2-2” is a non-reach (2R probability variation (probability)) variation pattern in which a slip effect is executed. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PC2-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PC2-1” because the slip effect is executed. The same applies to other fluctuation patterns in which a slip effect is executed. The variation pattern “PC2-3” is a non-reach (2R probability variation (probability)) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PC2-3” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PC2-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed. The variation pattern “PC1-1” belonging to the variation category “PC1” is a non-reach (2R probability variation (surprise)) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern “PC2-1”.

The variation pattern “PC3-1” belonging to the variation category “PC3” is a normal reach (2R probability variation (surprise)) variation pattern having a normal length as a normal reach ((2R probability variation (surprise))). The variation pattern “PC3-2” is a normal reach (2R probability variation (probability)) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once.
The fluctuation pattern “PC4-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PC4” has a super reach α (2R probability variation (surprise)) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as a super reach α (2R probability variation (surprise)). It is. The variation pattern “PC4-2” is a super reach α (2R probability variation (probability)) variation pattern in which pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a gas. The variation pattern “PC4-3” is a super reach α (2R probability variation (probability)) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PC4-4” is a super reach α (2R probability variation (probability)) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PC5-1” belonging to the variation category “PC5” is a superreach β (2R probability variation (surprise)) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as a super reach β (2R probability variation (surprise)). It is. The variation pattern “PC5-2” is a super reach β (2R probability variation (probability)) variation pattern in which pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a gas. The variation pattern “PC5-3” is a super reach β (2R probability variation (probability)) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed once. The variation pattern “PC5-4” is a super reach β (2R probability variation (probability)) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PD2-1” belonging to the variation category “PC2” is non-reach (2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion)) as non-reach (2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion)). )) Variation pattern. The variation pattern “PD2-2” is a non-reach (2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion)) variation pattern in which a slip effect is executed. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PD2-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PD2-1” because the slip effect is executed. The same applies to other fluctuation patterns in which a slip effect is executed. The variation pattern “PD2-3” is a non-reach (2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion)) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PD2-3” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PD2-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed. The variation pattern “PD1-1” belonging to the variation category “PD1” is a non-reach (2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion)) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern “PD2-1”.

The fluctuation pattern “PD3-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PD3” has a normal reach (2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion)) as a normal reach (2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion)). It is a fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern “PD3-2” is a normal reach (2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion)) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed once.
The variation pattern “PD4-1” belonging to the variation category “PD4” has a super-reach α (2R probability variation → 16R probability variation) in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as a super reach α (2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion)). (Promotion)) Fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern “PD4-2” is a super reach α (2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion)) variation pattern in which pseudo-variable variation (production) is executed as a gas. The variation pattern “PD4-3” is a super reach α (2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion)) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed once. The variation pattern “PD4-4” is a super reach α (2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion)) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PD5-1” belonging to the variation category “PD5” has a super-reach β (2R probability variation → 16R probability variation) in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as super reach β (2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion)). (Promotion)) Fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern “PD5-2” is a super reach β (2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion)) variation pattern in which pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a gas. The variation pattern “PD5-3” is a super reach β (2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion)) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PD5-4” is a super reach β (2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion)) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. The ROM 101 also includes data (for example, information for specifying the contents of the control command) constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, 5A, FIG. 5B, and data constituting a table as shown in FIG. 5C are stored.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 6, for example, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result in the first special symbol game (the special symbol game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is derived and displayed. To determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state as a big hit (16R probability change, 2R probability change (surprise), 2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion)) It is a table referred in order to determine based on random number value MR1. Further, the display result determination table 130A is displayed before the definite special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in the second special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B. , The variable display result is “big hit (16R probability variation, 2R probability variation (surprise probability), 2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion))” to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, a random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result It is a table that is referred to in order to make a decision based on

  In the display result determination table 130A, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result depending on whether the gaming state is the low probability low base state or the high probability high base state. A numerical value (determined value) is assigned to a special figure display result of “big hit (16R probability variation, 2R probability variation (surprise), 2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion))” or “losing”.

  In the display result determination table 130A, when the gaming state is the high-probability high-base state, a larger number of determination values is obtained than when the gaming state is the low-probability low-base state. 2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion)) ”. Specifically, in the setting example of the display result determination table 130A, when the gaming state is the low probability low base state, the predetermined range determination value (the value in the range of “8000” to “8189”) is “big hit (16R probability variation, 2R accuracy change (surprise accuracy), 2R accuracy change → 16R accuracy change (promotion)) ”. On the other hand, in the setting example of the display result determination table 130A, when the gaming state is the high-probability high-base state, the predetermined range of determination values “8000” to “8818” are “big hit (16R probability variation, 2R probability variation (surprise), 2R”. “Probability → 16R Probability (Promotion))” is assigned to the special figure display result. Thereby, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is “big hit (16R probability variation, 2R probability change (surprise probability), 2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion)) ”, and the probability of being determined is increased by controlling to the big hit gaming state.

  Note that different display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure. In the first special figure display result determination table for the first special figure, the special figure display result of “small hit” has a predetermined range. In the second special figure display result determination table for the second special figure, a special figure display result in which the predetermined value in the predetermined range is smaller than the first special figure display result determination table is “small hit”. May be assigned. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of “small hits” in a gaming state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. This is a table to be referred to. In the big hit type determination table 131, the first special symbol game (special game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed, or the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Depending on whether or not (special game using the second special figure) is executed, the numerical value (determined value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is “16R probability variation” or “2R probability variation (surprise)” And “2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion)”.

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table 131, when the first special figure game is executed, that is, when the special figure to be changed (also referred to as a fluctuation special figure) is the first special figure, a predetermined range of determination values ( When a value of “0” to “49”) is assigned to the jackpot type of “16R probability variation”, on the other hand, when the second special figure game is executed, that is, when the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure. Is assigned to a jackpot type having a predetermined range of determination values (a value in the range of “0” to “79” is “16R probability variation”) that is greater than that in the case where the variation special diagram is the first special diagram.

  Further, in the setting example of the big hit type determination table 131, when the variation special chart is the first special figure, the determined value of the predetermined range (the value in the range of “50” to “79”) is “2R probability variation (surprising probability). ) ”Is assigned to the big hit type, and when the second special figure game is executed and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the big hit type of“ 2R probability change (surprise) ”is A predetermined range determined value (a value in the range of “80” to “89”) smaller than a predetermined range determined value (a value in the range of “50” to “79”) in the first special figure is “2R probability change (abruptness). ) ”Is assigned to the jackpot type. With such a setting, in the second special game, it is less likely to become “2R probability change (surprise)” than in the first special game, so that the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. In an easy gaming state, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of “2R probability change (crash probability)” in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, and to prevent a decrease in gaming interest due to the extended game.

Further, in the setting example of the big hit type determination table 131, when the variation special chart is the first special figure, the predetermined range determination value (value in the range of “80” to “99”) is “2R probability variation → 16R. When the second special figure game is executed, when the variation special figure is the second special figure, “2R positive change → 16R positive change (promotion)” is assigned. With respect to the big hit type, a determined value in a predetermined range (a value in the range of “90” to “99”) smaller than a determined value in a predetermined range in the first special figure (a value in the range of “80” to “99”) Is assigned to the jackpot type of “2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion)”.
With such a setting, in the second special game, the game is more likely to be “16R probability change” than in the first special game, and the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of “2R probability change (surprise accuracy)” in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, and to prevent a decrease in game interest due to the extended game, and to obtain a prize ball in the first special game However, it is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement interest by controlling to be in an advantageous state such as time reduction control or probability variation control.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation category determination table that is referred to in order to determine the variation category as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table, different determination ratios, and the like. In the variation category determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for determining the variation category is assigned to each variation category. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different determined values (for example, the range and number of determined values) assigned to at least one variation category among a plurality of types of variation categories. Yes. Instead of a plurality of variation category determination tables, one large variation category determination table including information on all the variation category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different types of variation patterns that can be determined in the variation pattern determination table, different determination ratios, and the like. In the variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the variation pattern determination random value MR5 is assigned to each variation pattern. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different determination values (for example, a range or number of determination values) assigned to at least one variation pattern among a plurality of types of variation patterns. Yes. Instead of a plurality of variation pattern determination tables, one large variation pattern determination table including information of each variation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 101.

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data (for example, a special figure) Process flags). Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  In such a RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8 is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a general figure hold storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure storage unit 151A is a special game (not yet started) even though the game ball has passed (entered) through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting winning is generated. The holding data (first special figure holding information) of the first special figure game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates a reservation number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and a random number is generated by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as the hold data (first special figure hold information) until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B is a special game that has not yet started even though the game ball has passed (entered) through the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a second starting winning has occurred. Hold data (second special figure hold information) of (second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates a holding number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening, and makes a random number by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as the hold data (second special figure hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The first special symbol game hold data (first special figure hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition) by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The hold data (second special figure hold information based on the establishment of the second start winning prize) may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit.

  The general-purpose hold storage unit 151C stores on-hold data related to a general-purpose game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Information). For example, the universal figure storage unit 151C determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls in association with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed the passing gate 41. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR4 is stored as hold data (ordinary hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. As a specific example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value, data indicating an on state or an off state, and the like for each of a probability variation flag and a time reduction flag.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores the first reserved memory number count value and the second special figure reserved memory number, which are stored values of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first special figure reserved memory number. The second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting, the total reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number, etc. Remembered. The game control counter setting unit 154 also stores a variation count value that is a stored value of a variation counter for counting one or both of the probability variation count (ST count) and the time reduction count.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for taking in various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  A wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image for the image display device 5 and an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating a command for the audio control board 13 are transmitted to the effect control board 12. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (electric decoration signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14 are connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  For example, the ROM 121 executes the number of executions of the special figure game for executing the probability variation control, the remaining number of executions of the special figure game for executing the probability variation control, the number of executions of the special figure game for executing the time reduction control, or the time reduction control. An effect control pattern of a plurality of notification effects (recovery effects) is stored in accordance with the effect modes of a plurality of notification effects (recovery effects) for notifying the remaining number of executions of the special figure game to be performed.

  Note that the ROM 121 stores a hold display mode determination table that is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the first hold display displayed in the first start prize storage display area 5HL to be one of a plurality of types. May be. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of hold display mode determination tables different from each other in types of display modes that can be determined in the hold display mode determination table. Even if a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display is assigned to each display mode of the first hold display in the hold display mode determination table. Good. Instead of a plurality of hold display mode determination tables, one large hold display mode determination table including information of all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  In addition, for example, the ROM 121 stores a hold display mode determination table that is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the second hold display displayed in the second start winning prize storage display area 5HR to any one of a plurality of types. May be. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of hold display mode determination tables different from each other in types of display modes that can be determined in the hold display mode determination table. Even if a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the display mode of the second hold display is assigned to each display mode of the second hold display in the hold display mode determination table. Good. Instead of a plurality of hold display mode determination tables, one large hold display mode determination table including information of all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  The ROM 121 may store a hold effect execution presence / absence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute a hold effect (also referred to as an action effect or a hold change effect). Specifically, in the hold effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining whether or not the hold effect is executed is determined for each of the execution without the hold effect and the execution of the hold effect. It may be assigned. The holding effect is a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL to the notice mode, or the hold display displayed in the second start winning memory display area 5HR. For example, a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display form of the item to the notice form. Note that there are a plurality of types of hold effects, and there is also a hold change effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5 to change the display mode of the hold display. The hold change effect may also include a hold change gaze effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5 but does not change the display mode of the hold display.

  The ROM 121 may store an active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute an active display change effect that changes a special image including an active display. Specifically, in the active display change execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect, with or without execution of the active display change effect. (Determined value) may be assigned.

  The active display change effect is an effect (main notice effect) for changing a special image into a notice mode. In other words, the active display, the active display frame surrounding the active display, and information corresponding to the active display (for example, characters or images displayed around the active display or the active display frame) It is an effect to change (main notice effect). In the active display change effect, as described above, the common effect, the successful effect (also referred to as the active display change effect) executed when the special image is changed after the common effect is executed, and the common effect are executed. A failure effect (also referred to as an active display change gaze effect) that is executed when the special image is not changed later may be included. The success effect is an effect that acts on the special image in the display area of the image display device 5 to change the display mode of the special image. On the other hand, the failure effect is an effect that does not change the display mode of the special image by not acting on the special image in the display area of the image display device 5, or the failure effect acts on the special image in the display area of the image display device 5. This is an effect that does not change the display mode.

  Note that the ROM 121 has a plurality of active display change effect execution timing determination tables that are different from each other in the type of execution timing that can be determined in the execution timing determination table of the active display change effect and the determination ratio thereof. It may be stored as an effect execution timing determination table. Also, instead of a plurality of active display change effect execution timing determination tables, one large active display change effect execution timing determination table including information of all active display change effect execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121. Also good.

  The ROM 121 may store an active display change effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine an effect pattern (effect mode) of the active display change effect as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the active display change effect effect pattern determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes a random value (not shown) for determining the active display change effect effect pattern for each of the active display change effect effect patterns. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with may be assigned.

  Note that the ROM 121 may store a hold change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect (timing such as the number of changes to be executed). In addition, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of hold change effect execution timing determination tables that are different from each other in the types of execution timings that can be determined in the hold change effect execution timing determination table. In the hold change effect execution timing determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the hold change effect execution timing may be assigned to each execution timing. Further, instead of a plurality of hold change effect execution timing determination tables, one large hold change effect execution timing determination table including information of all the hold change effect execution timing determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

The ROM 121 stores a main notice effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of the main notice effect other than the active display change effect described above. It may be. In this case, specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of main notice effect pattern determination tables that are different from each other in the types of main notice effect patterns that can be determined in the main notice effect pattern determination table. In the main notice effect pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the main notice effect pattern may be assigned to each main notice effect pattern. .
Instead of a plurality of main notice effect pattern determination tables, one large main notice effect pattern determination table including information on all main notice effect pattern determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  The ROM 121 may store a hold change effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine the effect pattern (effect mode) of the hold change effect as one of a plurality of types. In this case, the ROM 121 is assigned a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the hold change effect pattern for each of the hold change effect patterns in the hold change effect pattern determination table. Just do it.

  Note that the ROM 121 may store a hold change change effect execution presence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not the change change effect effect is executed. In this case, in the pending change gaze effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (not shown) to be compared with a random number (not shown) for determining whether or not the hold change gaze effect is executed and not executed. (Determined value) may be assigned.

  The ROM 121 may store a hold change change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect effect (timing of how many changes will be executed later). . In this case, the ROM 121 only needs to store a plurality of hold change change effect execution timing determination tables that are different from each other in the type of execution timing that can be determined in the hold change change effect execution timing determination table. . A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the pending change gaze effect may be assigned to each of the execution timings in the pending change gaze effect execution timing determination table. . It should be noted that instead of a plurality of hold change change effect execution timing determination tables, one large change change effect effect execution timing determination table including information on all hold change effect display timing determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  Note that the ROM 121 may store a pending change gasset effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine an effect pattern (effect mode) of the pending change gasset effect as one of a plurality of types. In this case, the ROM 121 has a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the pending change gaze effect pattern for each of the pending change gaze effect patterns in the pending change gaze effect pattern determination table. It may be assigned.

  The ROM 121 also has an active display mode determination table (also referred to as “digestion display mode determination table”) that is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area AHA. May be stored. In this case, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of active display display mode determination tables that are different from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the active display display mode determination table. In the display mode determination table for active display, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the display mode for active display may be assigned to each display mode for active display. In other words, the ROM 121 has a plurality of active display display modes different from each other in the determined values (for example, the range and the number of determined values) assigned to at least one of the plurality of types of active display display modes. It is sufficient that the determination table is stored. Instead of a plurality of active display display mode determination tables, one large active display display mode determination table including information of all active display display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  In addition, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 120 to control effect operations performed by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the effect model). Data to be stored is stored. By setting the effect control pattern, various variable display operations such as decorative symbols, notice effects (including pre-read notice effects), and the like are realized.

  The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents of various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the effect control pattern is a decoration corresponding to a plurality of types of variation patterns, in the period from when the variation of the special symbol is started in the special game until the finalized special symbol that is the special graphic display result is derived and displayed. Design operations such as variable display operation, reach production, re-lottery production, etc., or various production operations that do not involve variable display of decorative symbols (for example, hold for the display mode of the hold display in the first start winning memory display area 5HL) Such as effects, hold effects for the display mode of the hold display in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, etc.).

  FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is composed of control data for controlling various effect operations such as an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and an end code. It is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, the timing of switching the effects control, and the like. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data for designating the content of operation control in a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 120. ) And a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer 120 when a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11. Data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating an audio output mode from the speaker 8 such as data indicating an output mode of a production sound or the like interlocked with a variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the audio control data is data that specifies an audio output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating the light emission operation mode of the lamp 9 (light emitter). That is, the lamp control data is data that designates the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, control contents of the rendering operation when the operation is detected effectively, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that designates an effect operation corresponding to an operation on the operation unit. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining various rendering operations executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the production control process timer value matches any of the production control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the production control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 8 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 9 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, and an operation specified by the operation detection control data. In the effective period, control for receiving the operation on the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B and determining the production content is performed. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The effect operation shown in FIG. 9B corresponds to the entire period from the start of the change of the decorative design to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative design An effect control pattern for executing an effect operation corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period of executing the notice effect) may be provided. Alternatively, in order to execute the presentation operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative symbols (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the jackpot gaming state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the jackpot gaming state, etc.) The effect control pattern may be provided.

  When setting the production control pattern, the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be stored. The storage address in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the stored data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer determination values. If the production control process timer value matches, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data is performed. Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect devices (image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, and the like) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. The control of the movable member provided in the production model is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that receives a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like develops the image data indicated by the command by reading it from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. Yes.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. The flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags. As a specific example, the production control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the probability change flag, data indicating the on state or the off state, and the like for each of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of the multiple types of counters. The effect control counter setting unit 193 also stores data indicating an effect number count value that is a stored value of an effect number counter for counting one or both of the number of time reductions and the number of probability changes.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first start winning reception command buffer 194A is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved storage number. . When there is a start winning at the first start winning opening, a start opening winning designation command (first starting slot winning designation command), a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command) ) Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The first start winning reception command buffer 194A has a storage area so that among these commands, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a first reserved memory number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the time of the first start prize from the head in the empty area of the first start prize reception command buffer 194A. At the time of the first start winning, command transmission is performed in the order of the first start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the first reserved memory number notification command. Accordingly, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 10B, the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the fluctuation are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. The category command and the first pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10B, the command is stored in the storage area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “3”.

  The commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B are deleted one by one every time variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the first special figure game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (in order of winning among commands). Specifically, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the first special figure game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the first start opening prize designation command is displayed. One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the first start opening prize designation command) Command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (buffer number size relationship).

  For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10B, when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the first special figure game, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “3” is changed to the buffer number “2”. Shifted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data configuring the second start winning reception command buffer 194B as shown in FIG. The second start winning reception command buffer 194B is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved storage number. . When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening, a start opening winning specifying command (second starting opening winning specifying command), a symbol specifying command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command (second reserved memory number notifying command) ) Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. In the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, a storage area is secured so that among these commands, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a pending storage count notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the second start winning prize from the head in the empty area of the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. At the time of the second start winning, command transmission is performed in the order of the second start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 10C, the second start opening winning designation command and the symbol designation command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. The variable category command and the pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10C, the commands are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “2”.

  The commands stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 10C are deleted one by one every time variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the second special game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (in order of winning among commands). Specifically, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the second start opening prize designation command is displayed. One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the second start opening winning designation command) Command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (buffer number size relationship).

  For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10C, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the second special figure game, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data constituting the first prefetch notice buffer 194C as shown in FIG. 10D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first prefetch notice buffer 194C is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C, the contents of the decision concerning the prefetch notice effects related to the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 and the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the first prefetch notice buffer 194C, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. When shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the second prefetch notice buffer 194D as shown in FIG. 10E is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second prefetch notice buffer 194D is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the contents of the prefetch notice effects relating to the hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 or the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. In the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. When the number is shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 executing such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, a warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, thereby moving the normal symbol variable display and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 11 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S101 of FIG. 12 as the start winning determination process. FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in steps S208 and S211 in FIG. FIG. 15A is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S220 of FIG. 14 as the winning random number determination process.

  In the start winning determination process in the special symbol process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first detects a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is ON (step S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the first special figure holding memory number (the first special figure game holding number) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, the upper limit storing number). (4)) is determined (step S202). For example, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special figure reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. When the number of first special figure reservation storage is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “1” ( Step S207).

  When the first start opening switch 22A is OFF in step S201 (step S201; No), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes), After executing the process of step S209, the second start port switch 22B is based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. It is determined whether or not is on (step S203). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step S203; Yes), the second special figure holding memory number (the second special figure game holding number) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, the upper limit memory number). (4)) is determined (step S204). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special figure holding storage number is not the upper limit value in step S204 (step S204; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “2” ( Step S210).

  After executing the process of step S207, the start winning time process (FIG. 14) is executed (step S208), the stored value of the start port buffer is set to “0” (initialized) (step S209), and the process of step S203 is performed. Proceed to After executing the process of step S210, the start winning time process (FIG. 14) is executed (step S211), the stored value of the start port buffer is set to “0” (initialized) (step S212), and the start winning determination process Exit. Thereby, even if it is a case where the start winning of a game ball is detected at the same time in the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the processing based on each detection can be completed.

  As the start winning process (steps S208 and S211), the CPU 103 updates the special figure holding storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, by one (step S215 in FIG. 14). . For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. Following the process of step S215, the total number of reserved storage is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S216). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated to add one.

  After executing the process of step S216, the CPU 103 determines the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted (step S217). The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit 151 corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S218). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S218, transmission setting of a start opening prize designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed (step S219). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to transmit a first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Setting for transmitting the second start opening winning designation command is performed. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  Following the process of step S219, a winning random number determination process is executed (step S220). Thereafter, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reserved storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. For this purpose (step S221). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  As the winning random number determination process (step S220), the CPU 103, for example, confirms the state of the time reduction flag or the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, etc. Is identified (step S401 in FIG. 15A). The CPU 103 identifies the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on by checking the state of the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, and the time variation flag is off when the probability variation flag is off. When is on, it specifies that the time is short.

  That is, the CPU 103 determines whether the probability change flag is on and the time reduction flag is on, for example, depending on whether each of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on or off. Specifies that the gaming state is a high probability high base state, and if the probability variation flag is on and the hourly flag is off, the gaming state is identified as a high probability low base state and the probability variation flag is off. When the time-short flag is on, the low-accuracy high-base state is specified, and when both the probability variation flag and the time-short flag are off, the low-accuracy low-base state (normal state) is specified. That is, the CPU 103 identifies which state the current gaming state is based on the state of the probability change flag and the time-shortage flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152.

  Following the processing in step S401, table data corresponding to the current gaming state is set from the table data constituting the display result determination table 130A (step S402). When using different special figure display result determination tables (first special figure display result determination table, second special figure display result determination table) for the first special figure and the second special figure, the start port buffer value is “1”. ”Is used, the first special figure display result determination table is used, and when the start port buffer value is“ 2 ”, the second special figure display result determination table may be used. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S217 in FIG. 14 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step S403). In the big hit determination range, individual decision values assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the special figure display result decision table data set by the processing of step S402 are set. It suffices to determine whether or not there is a decision value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the decision value with each other. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, when it is determined that the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random value MR1 is determined to be “big hit” (big hit start determination) can do.

  If it is determined in step S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S403; Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S409). At this time, the CPU 103 determines in accordance with the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified in correspondence with the start port buffer value. The big hit type determination table data is set from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table 131. Then, by referring to the set big hit type determination table data, it is determined which of the multiple types of big hit types is determined. Settings for transmitting the symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result of the process in step S409 to the effect control board 12 are performed (step S410).

  When it is determined in step S403 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S403; No), or after performing any of the processing of step S410, the variation category is determined (step S412). That is, the variation category is determined to be one of a plurality of types shown in FIGS. 5A, 5B, and 5C. In the process of step S412, the CPU 103 determines a plurality of variable category determination tables stored in the ROM 101 (a plurality of types of variable category determinations that are different from each other, such as the types of variable categories that can be determined in the variable category determination table and their determination ratios). One of the variation category determination tables to be set as the use table is selected from among the tables.

  Specifically, the CPU 103 uses a special figure display result (for example, the determination result of step S403) or a stored memory number (for example, a stored value of a first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154). One of the variation category determination tables to be set as a use table is selected based on a certain first stored memory count value or the like. Subsequently, the CPU 103 converts the variable category determination table set as the use table and numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variable category extracted from the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. Based on this, any variation category is determined from a plurality of types of variation categories.

  FIG. 16A, FIG. 16B, and FIG. 16C are diagrams showing examples of selection of the variation category determination table. FIG. 16A is a diagram showing a selection example of the variation category determination table when the low probability low base state is set, that is, when both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off, and FIG. When the probability base state, that is, when both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are on, the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, the remaining number of executions of the special figure game in which the time reduction control is executed or the probability variation control is executed) FIG. 16C is a diagram showing a selection example of the variation category determination table when one or both of the remaining number of executions of the special figure game to be executed is a specific number (for example, 50) or more. In the high base state, that is, when the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are both turned on, the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, the remaining number of executions or the probability variation of the special game in which the time reduction control is executed) One or both) a particular number of the remaining execution count of special symbol game control is executed (for example, a diagram showing a selection example of the variation category determination table when less than 50 times).

  17A, 17B, and 17C are diagrams illustrating a configuration example of the variation category determination table. FIG. 17A is a diagram showing a configuration example of the variation category determination table when the low probability low base state is set, that is, when both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off, and FIG. When the probability base state, that is, when both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are on, the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, the remaining number of executions of the special figure game in which the time reduction control is executed or probability variation control is FIG. 17C is a diagram showing a configuration example of the variation category determination table when one or both of the remaining number of executions of the special figure game to be executed is a specific number (for example, 50) or more. FIG. In the high base state, that is, when the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are both turned on, the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, the remaining number of executions or the probability variation of the special game in which the time reduction control is executed) One or both) a particular number of the remaining execution count of special symbol game control is executed (for example, a diagram showing a configuration example of a variation category determination table when less than 50 times).

  The configuration examples of these variation category determination tables are six types of variation category tables that are referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of variation categories according to the probability variation flag, the time reduction flag, and the remaining number of advantageous states. . FIG. 17A (A) is a configuration example of a variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL1A” in the drawing) using a certain variation category determination table of the above six types. FIG. 17A (B) is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL2A” in the figure). FIG. 17A (C) is a configuration example of a variation category determination table using still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL3A” in the figure). FIG. 17A (D) is a configuration example of a variation category determination table using still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL4A” in the figure). FIG. 17A (E) is a configuration example of a variation category determination table using still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL5A” in the figure). FIG. 17A (F) is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL6A” in the figure). For simplification of description, the variation category determination table in which the determination ratio is set as shown in FIG. 17A (A) may be simply referred to as the variation category determination table in FIG. 17A (A). The same applies to FIGS. 17A (B) to 17A (F) and other determination tables such as a variation pattern determination table.

  FIG. 17B (A) is a configuration example of a variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL1B” in the figure) using a certain variation category determination table of the above six types. FIG. 17B (B) is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL2B” in the figure). FIG. 17B (C) is a configuration example of a variation category determination table by still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL3B” in the figure). FIG. 17B (D) is a configuration example of a variation category determination table using still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL4B” in the figure). FIG. 17B (E) is a configuration example of a variation category determination table using still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL5B” in the figure). FIG. 17B (F) is a configuration example of a variation category determination table using still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL6B” in the figure). For simplification of description, the variation category determination table in which the determination ratio is set as shown in FIG. 17B (A) may be simply referred to as the variation category determination table in FIG. 17B (A). The same applies to FIGS. 17B (B) to 17B (F) and other determination tables such as a variation pattern determination table.

  FIG. 17C (A) is a configuration example of a variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL1C” in the drawing) using a certain variation category determination table among the above six types. FIG. 17C (B) is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL2C” in the figure). FIG. 17C (C) is a configuration example of a variation category determination table using still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL3C” in the figure). FIG. 17C (D) is a configuration example of a variation category determination table using still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL4C” in the figure). FIG. 17C (E) is a configuration example of a variation category determination table by still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL5C” in the figure). FIG. 17C (F) is a configuration example of a variation category determination table by still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL6C” in the figure). For simplification of description, the variation category determination table in which the determination ratio is set as shown in FIG. 17C (A) may be simply referred to as the variation category determination table in FIG. 17C (A). The same applies to FIGS. 17C (B) to 17C (F) and other determination tables such as a variation pattern determination table.

  By checking the state of the probability change flag and the state of the short time flag, the current gaming state is determined, and if it is controlled to the advantageous state, for example, if it is controlled to the probability change state or the short time state, the remaining probability change Selection examples of a plurality of variation category determination tables as shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C according to the number of times and the remaining short time, and the configuration of the variation category determination tables as shown in FIGS. 17A, 17B, and 17C An example is selected. Then, any of the selected FIGS. 16A to 16C is selected from the configuration examples of the selected variation category determination table of FIGS. 17A, 17B, and 17C. 17A (F) six types (setting “C-TBL1A” to setting “C-TBL6A”), or six types (FIG. 17B (A) to FIG. 17B (F) (setting “C-TBL1B” to setting “C”). -TBL6B "), six types of Figs. 17B (A) to 17B (F), or six types of Figs. 17C (A) to 17C (F) (setting" C-TBL1C "to setting" C-TBL6C ") 17C (A) to FIG. 17C (F), a selection example for selecting any setting, that is, any one of the above-described six types of variation category determination tables. This is a selection example for selecting.

  17A (A), the variation category determination table “C-TBL1A” (the variation category determination table “C-TBL2A” in FIG. 17A (B), the variation category determination table “C-TBL3A” in FIG. 17A (C)), FIG. (D) Variation category determination table “C-TBL4A”, variation category determination table “C-TBL5A” in FIG. 17A (E), variation category determination table “C-TBL6A” in FIG. Numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random number MR3 for determining the variation category are assigned to a plurality of types of variation categories.

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1A” in FIG. 17A (A), 0 out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3 is the variation category. 70 (values in the range from “0” to “69”) are assigned to the variable category “PA2” and 27 (values in the range from “70” to “96”) are assigned to the “PA1”. Assigned to “PA3”, two (values in the range of “97” to “98”) are assigned to the variation category “PA4”, and one (value “99”) is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. Yes. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1A” in FIG. 17A (A), the variation category “PA1” is 0% (0 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 70% (70 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 27% (27 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2A” in FIG. 17A (B), four (“0”) out of 100 determination values (in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 3 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, 85 (values in the range of“ 4 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and 8 (“ 89 ” ”To“ 96 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA3 ”, two (values in the range of“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA4 ”, and one (value“ 99 ”) is assigned to the variable category“ PA5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2A” in FIG. 17B, the variation category “PA1” is 4% (4 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 85% (85 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3A” in FIG. 17A (C), 64 (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 63 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, 25 (values in the range of“ 64 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and 8 (“ 89 ” ”To“ 96 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA3 ”, two (values in the range of“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA4 ”, and one (value“ 99 ”) is assigned to the variable category“ PA5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3A” in FIG. 17C, the variation category “PA1” is 64% (64 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 25% (25 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4A” in FIG. 17A (D), 20 (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 19 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB3 ”, and 40 (values in the range of“ 20 ”to“ 59 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB4 ”and 40 (“ 60 ” ”To“ 99 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4A” in FIG. 17A (D), the variation category “PB3” is 20% (20 ÷ 100), the variation category “PB4” is 40% (40 ÷ 100), The variation category “PB5” is determined at a rate of 40% (40 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL5A” in FIG. 17A (E), 41 (“0”) out of 100 determination values of the random value MR3 (values in the range of “0” to “99”). ”To“ 40 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PC2 ”, 20 (values in the range of“ 41 ”to“ 60 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PC3 ”, and 29 (“ 61 ” ”To“ 89 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PC4 ”, and 10 (values in the range of“ 90 ”to“ 99 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PC5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL5A” in FIG. 17A (E), the variation category “PC2” is 41% (41 ÷ 100), the variation category “PC3” is 20% (20 ÷ 100), The variation category “PC4” is determined at a rate of 29% (29 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PC5” is determined at a rate of 10% (10 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL6A” in FIG. 17A (F), 11 (“0”) out of 100 determined values of the random value MR3 (values in the range of “0” to “99”). ”To“ 10 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PD2 ”, 40 (values in the range of“ 11 ”to“ 50 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PD3 ”, and 29 (“ 51 ” ”To“ 79 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PD4 ”, and 20 (values in the range of“ 80 ”to“ 99 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PD5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL6A” in FIG. 17A (F), the variation category “PD2” is 11% (11 ÷ 100), the variation category “PD3” is 40% (40 ÷ 100), The variation category “PD4” is determined at a rate of 29% (29 ÷ 100) and the variation category “PD5” is determined at a rate of 20% (20 ÷ 100).

  17A (A), the variation category determination table “C-TBL1A” (the variation category determination table “C-TBL2A” in FIG. 17A (B), the variation category determination table “C-TBL3A” in FIG. 17A (C)), FIG. (D) Variation category determination table “C-TBL4A”, variation category determination table “C-TBL5A” in FIG. 17A (E), variation category determination table “C-TBL6A” in FIG. Numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random number MR3 for determining the variation category are assigned to a plurality of types of variation categories.

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1A” in FIG. 17A (A), 0 out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3 is the variation category. 70 (values in the range from “0” to “69”) are assigned to the variable category “PA2” and 27 (values in the range from “70” to “96”) are assigned to the “PA1”. Assigned to “PA3”, two (values in the range of “97” to “98”) are assigned to the variation category “PA4”, and one (value “99”) is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. Yes. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1A” in FIG. 17A (A), the variation category “PA1” is 0% (0 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 70% (70 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 27% (27 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2A” in FIG. 17A (B), four (“0”) out of 100 determination values (in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 3 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, 85 (values in the range of“ 4 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and 8 (“ 89 ” ”To“ 96 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA3 ”, two (values in the range of“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA4 ”, and one (value“ 99 ”) is assigned to the variable category“ PA5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2A” in FIG. 17A (B), the variation category “PA1” is 4% (4 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 85% (85 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3A” in FIG. 17A (C), 64 (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 63 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, 25 (values in the range of“ 64 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and 8 (“ 89 ” ”To“ 96 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA3 ”, two (values in the range of“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA4 ”, and one (value“ 99 ”) is assigned to the variable category“ PA5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3A” in FIG. 17A (C), the variation category “PA1” is 64% (64 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 25% (25 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4A” in FIG. 17A (D), 20 (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 19 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB3 ”, and 40 (values in the range of“ 20 ”to“ 59 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB4 ”and 40 (“ 60 ” ”To“ 99 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4A” in FIG. 17A (D), the variation category “PB3” is 20% (20 ÷ 100), the variation category “PB4” is 40% (40 ÷ 100), The variation category “PB5” is determined at a rate of 40% (40 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL5A” in FIG. 17A (E), 41 (“0”) out of 100 determination values of the random value MR3 (values in the range of “0” to “99”). ”To“ 40 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PC2 ”, 20 (values in the range of“ 41 ”to“ 60 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PC3 ”, and 29 (“ 61 ” ”To“ 89 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PC4 ”, and 10 (values in the range of“ 90 ”to“ 99 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PC5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL5A” in FIG. 17A (E), the variation category “PC2” is 41% (41 ÷ 100), the variation category “PC3” is 20% (20 ÷ 100), The variation category “PC4” is determined at a rate of 29% (29 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PC5” is determined at a rate of 10% (10 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL6A” in FIG. 17A (F), 11 (“0”) out of 100 determined values of the random value MR3 (values in the range of “0” to “99”). ”To“ 10 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PD2 ”, 40 (values in the range of“ 11 ”to“ 50 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PD3 ”, and 29 (“ 51 ” ”To“ 79 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PD4 ”, and 20 (values in the range of“ 80 ”to“ 99 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PD5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL6A” in FIG. 17A (F), the variation category “PD2” is 11% (11 ÷ 100), the variation category “PD3” is 40% (40 ÷ 100), The variation category “PD4” is determined at a rate of 29% (29 ÷ 100) and the variation category “PD5” is determined at a rate of 20% (20 ÷ 100).

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 17A (A) to 17A (C), when the special figure display result is “losing”, when the number of reserved memories is large, compared to when the number of reserved memories is small, shortening / non-reach ( Loss) The determination rate of the variation category (variation category “PA1”) is increased. Specifically, the determination rate “64%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL3A” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the number of stored storages is “4”. > Determination ratio “4%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL2A” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the reserved storage number is “3” or “2” > The determination ratio “0%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL1A” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the stored storage number is “1”.

  Also, in the setting examples of FIGS. 17A (A) to 17A (C), when the special figure display result is “losing”, the super-reach (losing) variation category ( The determination ratio of the variation category “PA4” or the variation category “PA5”) is made constant. Specifically, in any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1A”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2A”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3A”, the determination ratio “ 1% ”, and the decision rate“ 2% ”for the variable category“ PA4 ”.

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 17A (A) to 17A (C), any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1A”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2A”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3A”. Even so, there is a determined value of the random value MR3 corresponding to the same (common) variation category (the same variation category is determined). That is, if the determined value of the random value MR3 is a certain value, it is any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1A”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2A”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3A”. Also, the same variation category is determined. For example, when the determined value of the random number MR3 is “99”, any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1A”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2A”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3A” Also, the variation category “PA5” is determined. When the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “97” to “98”, the variation category “PA4” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables.

  Further, when the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “89” to “96”, the variation category “PA3” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. When the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “64” to “69”, the variation category “PA2” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. As a result, if the determined value of the random number MR3 is a certain value (a value in each of the above-described ranges), the reach, the super reach, the super reach α, and the super reach β are determined in advance. It can be easily determined. Accordingly, it is possible to notify them before the variable display corresponding to the start prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In the setting examples of FIGS. 17A (A) to 17A (C), when the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “0” to “69”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1A”, The variable category “PA1” or “PA2” is determined in any of the variable category determination table “C-TBL2A” and the variable category determination table “C-TBL3A”. Thereby, it can be easily determined in advance whether at least the reach is not achieved.

  17B (A), the variation category determination table “C-TBL1B” (the variation category determination table “C-TBL2B” in FIG. 17B (B), the variation category determination table “C-TBL3B” in FIG. 17B (C)), FIG. (D) The variation category determination table “C-TBL4B”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL5B” in FIG. 17B (E), and the variation category determination table “C-TBL6B” in FIG. Numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random number MR3 for determining the variation category are assigned to a plurality of types of variation categories.

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1B” in FIG. 17B (A), 0 out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3 is the variation category. Assigned to “PA1”, 100 (values in the range of “0” to “99”) are assigned to the fluctuation category “PA2”, 0 are assigned to the fluctuation category “PA3”, and 0 are assigned to the fluctuation category “PA3”. PA4 "is assigned, and 0 is assigned to the fluctuation category" PA5 ". That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1B” in FIG. 17B (A), the variation category “PA1” is 0% (0 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 100% (100 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 0% (0 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 0% (0 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 0% (0 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2B” in FIG. 17B (B), 21 (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 20 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA1 ”, 79 (values in the range of“ 21 ”to“ 99 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA2 ”, and 0 is the fluctuation category. “PA3” is assigned, 0 is assigned to the variation category “PA4”, and 0 is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2B” in FIG. 17B (B), the variation category “PA1” is 21% (21 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 79% (79 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 0% (0 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 0% (0 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 0% (0 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3B” in FIG. 17B (C), 64 (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 63 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, 36 (values in the range of“ 64 ”to“ 99 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and 0 (is the variation). 17 is assigned to the category “PA3”, 0 is assigned to the variation category “PA4”, and 0 is assigned to the variation category “PA5.” That is, the variation category determination table “C-TBL3B” in FIG. In the setting example, the fluctuation category “PA1” is 64% (64 ÷ 100), the fluctuation category “PA2” is 36% (36 ÷ 100), the fluctuation category “PA3” is 0% (0 ÷ 100), and the fluctuation category " A4 "is 0% (0 ÷ 100), change category" PA5 "is determined at the rate of 0% (0 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4B” in FIG. 17B (D), 20 (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 19 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB3 ”, and 40 (values in the range of“ 20 ”to“ 59 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB4 ”and 40 (“ 60 ” ”To“ 99 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4B” in FIG. 17B (D), the variation category “PB3” is 20% (20 ÷ 100), the variation category “PB4” is 40% (40 ÷ 100), The variation category “PB5” is determined at a rate of 40% (40 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL5B” in FIG. 17B (E), 100 (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 99 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PC2 ”, 0 is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PC3 ”, 0 is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PC4 ”, and 0 is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PC4 ”. PC5 ". That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL5B” in FIG. 17B (E), the variation category “PC2” is 100% (100 ÷ 100), the variation category “PC3” is 0% (0 ÷ 100), The variation category “PC4” is determined at a rate of 0% (0 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PC5” is determined at a rate of 0% (0 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL6B” in FIG. 17B (F), 100 (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 99 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PD2 ”, 0 is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PD3 ”, 0 is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PD4 ”, and 0 is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PD4 ”. PD5 ". That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL6B” in FIG. 17B (F), the variation category “PD2” is 100% (100 ÷ 100), the variation category “PD3” is 0% (0 ÷ 100), The variation category “PD4” is determined at a rate of 0% (0 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PD5” is determined at a rate of 0% (0 ÷ 100).

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 17B (A) to 17B (C), when the special figure display result is “losing”, when the number of reserved memories is large, the shortened / non-reachable ( Loss) The determination rate of the variation category (variation category “PA1”) is increased. Specifically, the determination ratio “64%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL3B” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the number of reserved memories is “4”. > Determination ratio “21%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL2B” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the reserved storage number is “3” or “2” > The determination ratio “0%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL1B” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the number of stored storages is “1”.

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 17B (A) to 17B (C), when the special figure display result is “losing”, normal reach (losing), super reach α (losing), super reach regardless of the number of stored storages. The determination ratio of the variation category determination table corresponding to reach loss such as β (loss) is not assigned. That is, when the remaining number of advantageous states and advantageous states with reference to the setting examples in FIGS. 17B (A) to 17B (C) is equal to or greater than a specific number, any of normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, etc. Even in the case of reach, when the variation category determination table corresponding to reach is selected, it is determined that “16R probability variation” is to be established.

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 17B (A) to 17B (C), any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1B”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2B”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3B”. Even so, there is a determined value of the random value MR3 corresponding to the same (common) variation category (the same variation category is determined). That is, if the determined value of the random value MR3 is a certain value, it is any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1B”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2B”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3B”. Also, the same variation category is determined. For example, when the determined values of the random number MR3 are “64” to “99”, the variation category determination table “C-TBLB”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2B”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3B” In any case, the variation category “PA2” is determined.

  The variation category determination table “C-TBL1C” in FIG. 17C (A) (the variation category determination table “C-TBL2C” in FIG. 17B (B), the variation category determination table “C-TBL3C” in FIG. 17C (C)), FIG. The variation category determination table “C-TBL4C” in (D), the variation category determination table “C-TBL5C” in FIG. 17C (E), and the variation category determination table “C-TBL6C” in FIG. Numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random number MR3 for determining the variation category are assigned to a plurality of types of variation categories.

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1C” in FIG. 17C (A), 0 out of 100 determined values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3 is the variation category. 70 (values in the range of “0” to “69”) are assigned to the variation category “PA2”, 27 are assigned to the variation category “PA3”, and 2 (“97”). To (98) is assigned to the variation category “PA4”, and one (value of “99”) is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1C” in FIG. 17C (A), the variation category “PA1” is 0% (0 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 70% (70 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 27% (27 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2C” in FIG. 17C (B), four (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values ranging from “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 3 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA1 ”, 85 pieces (values ranging from“ 4 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA2 ”, and seven pieces (“ 88 ” ”To“ 96 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA3 ”, and two (values in the range of“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA4 ”and one (“ 99 ”). ”) Is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2C” in FIG. 17C (B), the variation category “PA1” is 4% (4 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 85% (85 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 7% (7 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3C” in FIG. 17C (C), 40 (“0”) out of 100 determination values of the random value MR3 (values in the range of “0” to “99”). ”To“ 39 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, 49 (values in the range of“ 40 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and 7 (“ 88 ” ”To“ 96 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA3 ”, and two (values in the range of“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA4 ”and one (“ 99 ”). ”) Is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3C” in FIG. 17C (C), the variation category “PA1” is 40% (40 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 49% (49 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 7% (7 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4C” in FIG. 17C (D), ten (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 9 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB3 ”, 40 (values in the range of“ 10 ”to“ 49 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB4 ”, and 50 (“ 50 ” ”To“ 99 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4C” in FIG. 17C (D), the variation category “PB3” is 10% (10 ÷ 100), the variation category “PB4” is 40% (40 ÷ 100), The variation category “PB5” is determined at a rate of 50% (50 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL5C” in FIG. 17C (E), 36 (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values ranging from “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 35 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PC2 ”, 25 (values in the range of“ 36 ”to“ 60 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PC3 ”, and 29 (“ 61 ” ”To“ 89 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PC4 ”, and 10 (values in the range of“ 90 ”to“ 99 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PC5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL5C” in FIG. 17C (E), the variation category “PC2” is 36% (36 ÷ 100), the variation category “PC3” is 25% (25 ÷ 100), The variation category “PC4” is determined at a rate of 29% (29 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PC5” is determined at a rate of 10% (10 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL6C” in FIG. 17C (F), 11 (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values ranging from “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 10 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PD2 ”, 30 (values in the range of“ 11 ”to“ 40 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PD3 ”, and 39 (“ 41 ” ”To“ 79 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PD4 ”, and 20 (values in the range of“ 80 ”to“ 99 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PD5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL6C” in FIG. 17C (F), the variation category “PD2” is 11% (11 ÷ 100), the variation category “PD3” is 30% (30 ÷ 100), The variation category “PD4” is determined at a rate of 39% (39 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PD5” is determined at a rate of 20% (20 ÷ 100).

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 17C (A) to 17C (C), when the special figure display result is “losing”, when the number of reserved memories is large, the shortened / non-reachable ( Loss) The determination rate of the variation category (variation category “PA1”) is increased. Specifically, the determination ratio “40%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL3C” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the number of stored storages is “4”. > Determination ratio “4%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL2C” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the reserved storage number is “3” or “2” > The determination ratio “0%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL1C” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the number of stored storages is “1”.

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 17C (A) to 17C (C), when the special figure display result is “losing”, even if the number of reserved storage is large or small, the variation category of super reach (losing) ( The determination ratio of the variation category “PA4” or the variation category “PA5”) is made constant. Specifically, in any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1C”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2C”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3C”, the determination ratio “ 1% ”, and the decision rate“ 2% ”for the variable category“ PA4 ”.

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 17C (A) to 17C (C), any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1C”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2C”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3C”. Even so, there is a determined value of the random value MR3 corresponding to the same (common) variation category (the same variation category is determined). That is, if the determined value of the random value MR3 is a certain value, it is any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1C”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2C”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3C”. Also, the same variation category is determined. For example, when the determined value of the random value MR3 is “99”, any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1C”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2C”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3C” Also, the variation category “PA5” is determined. When the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “97” to “98”, the variation category “PA4” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables.

  Further, in the setting examples of FIGS. 17C (A) to 17C (C), when the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “89” to “96”, any of the above-described variation category determination tables. Also, the variation category “PA3” is determined. When the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “40” to “88”, the variation category “PA2” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. As a result, if the determined value of the random number MR3 is a certain value (a value in each of the above-described ranges), the reach, the super reach, the super reach α, and the super reach β are determined in advance. It can be easily determined. Accordingly, it is possible to notify them before the variable display corresponding to the start prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In the setting examples of FIGS. 17C (A) to 17C (C), when the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “0” to “69”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1C”, In either the variation category determination table “C-TBL2C” or the variation category determination table “C-TBL3C”, the variation category “PA1” or “PA2” is determined. Thereby, it can be easily determined in advance whether at least the reach is not achieved.

  According to FIG. 17B and FIG. 17C, when the remaining number of advantageous states is equal to or greater than a specific number, that is, in the case of the setting example of FIG. Only when the jackpot type is 16R probability variation. That is, in the setting example of FIG. 17B, the variation category that causes reach loss is not selected, and other than the case of 16R probability variation, for example, loss, 2R probability variation (surprise accuracy), 2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion). In this case, only one of the non-reach (losing) fluctuation category and the non-reach (big hit) fluctuation category is selected.

  In addition, when the remaining number of advantageous states is less than the specific number of times, that is, in the setting example of FIG. 17C, the ratio of selecting a variation category that requires a long variation time is higher than in the setting example of FIG. 17B. Is set. That is, in the case of the setting example in FIG. 17C, the rate of selection of a variation category with a late timing for notifying that a big hit or a loss has occurred is higher than in the setting example in FIG. 17B. In the case of the setting example in FIG. 17C, since a variation category requiring a long variation time is easily selected as described above, a variation category having a late notification timing for notifying that reach or reach loss is selected is high. It has become.

  Then, after setting for transmitting any of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 15B to the effect control board 12 in accordance with the determination result (determination result) by the process of step S412 (step S412). S413), the winning random number determination process is terminated. Here, out of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 15B, the command C608H is a command corresponding to the variation category PCX, and the variation category PC2, PC3, PC4, or PC5 shown in FIG. The command to be transmitted to the control board 12 may be a variable category command corresponding to each of the variable categories PC2, PC3, PC4, PC5, such as the command C605H, the command C606H, and the command C607H. . Also, among the variation category commands shown in FIG. 15B, the command C609H is a command corresponding to the variation category PDX, and the production control is performed as to which of the variation categories PD2, PD3, PD4, and PD5 shown in FIG. 5C. Although it is a command for transmitting to the substrate 12, a variation category command corresponding to each of the variation categories PD2, PD3, PD4, and PD5, such as a command C605H, a command C606H, and a command C607H, may be used.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 in FIG. 12, the CPU 103 selects any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. And run.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance. The special symbol normal process will be described later.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types shown in FIGS. 5A, 5B, and 5C, a first variation start command (or a second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command And a transmission setting process for transmitting a variable display result notification command and the like. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable symbol special display is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2”. The setting of the variation pattern will be described later.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or incremented by one. The first special symbol game (special game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol game (special game using the second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B The elapsed time is measured by a common timer regardless of whether the game is a graphic game). Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the special symbol variation process of step S112 only needs to be a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and the definite special symbol resulting in the variable symbol variable display result is stopped and displayed (derived). A process for performing the setting is included. In addition, when the gaming state is other than the low probability low base state (normal mode), that is, in the case of one or both of the probability variation state (high probability state) and the short time state (high base state), , Processing for adding the counter value of the variation counter by the game control counter setting unit 154, processing for resetting, special figure in the probability variation state (high accuracy state), and special diagram in the short time state (high base state) Processing to determine whether or not the number of times the game has been executed has reached a predetermined number of times, and the probability variation control and time shortening control for controlling to one or both of the probability variation state (high accuracy state) and the time-short state (high base state) are terminated and low accuracy is achieved. The game state transition process at the time of change such as a process for setting one or both of the state and the low base state is also included.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is turned on. When the jackpot flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. Is done. When the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit release pre-processing includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state based on the fact that the variable display result becomes “big hit”, etc. include. At this time, for example, the jackpot type is “16R probability variation”, “2R probability variation (surprise)”, or “2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion)”. An upper limit may be set. As an example, in response to the jackpot type “16R probability change”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”, and the number of opening of the big winning opening that becomes the upper limit number of times to execute the round is set. Is set to “16 times” to set the normal open big hit state.

Corresponding to the big hit type “2R probability change (surprise)”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.1 second”, and the maximum winning number is set to the maximum number of times the round is executed. By setting the number of times the mouth is opened to “twice”, it is sufficient that the short-term open big hit state is set.
Corresponding to the big hit type “2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion)”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is first set to “0.1 second”, and the maximum number of rounds to be executed The number of times that the grand prize opening will be opened is set to “2 times”, then the upper limit of the period during which the grand prize opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”, and the maximum number of times that the round will be executed By setting the number of times of opening to “14 times”, the normal opening big hit state may be set after the short-term opening big hit state.
At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  Corresponding to the jackpot type “2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion)”, the number of times of opening of the big prize opening, which is the upper limit number of times to execute the round, is set to “16 times”, and the big winning opening is in a short-term open state. The opening time of the big winning opening may be set as in the normal open state, or the maximum number of rounds is executed corresponding to the big hit type “2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion)” It is also possible to set the number of times of opening of the big prize opening to “16 times” and to set the opening time of the big prize opening like the short prize opening state.

  Corresponding to the jackpot type “2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion)”, the number of times of opening the big winning opening, which is the maximum number of rounds to be executed, is set to “16 times”, and in the first round game 1st round after opening the grand prize opening twice with the upper limit of “0.1 second” for the period of time to open the big prize opening corresponding to 2R probability change (surprise) (short-term open state) In the game, the upper limit of the period in which the third big prize opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”. In round games from the second round to the sixteenth round, the upper limit of the period in which the big prize opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”. 29 seconds "may be set. At this time, if it is difficult to set the upper limit of the period during which the third big prize opening in the first round game is in the open state to “29 seconds”, the third big prize opening in the first round game The upper limit of the period for the open state may be shorter than the upper limit of the period for the normal open state in other rounds other than the first round, such as “25 seconds”, for example.

  Corresponding to the jackpot type “2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion)”, the number of times of opening of the big prize opening, which is the upper limit number of times to execute the round, is set to “16 times”, and the big winning opening is in a short-term open state. Alternatively, the opening time of the special winning opening may be set as in the normal open state and the long open state.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring an elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, a number of game balls detected by the measured elapsed time and the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the special winning opening door solenoid 82, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. .

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is in the open state has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In some cases, processing for setting to transmit a jackpot end designation command is included. When the number of round executions has not reached the maximum value of the number of times of winning the special winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, or the lamp 9. And a post-hit game state transition process, which will be described later, for performing settings for starting probability variation control and time-saving control in response to the end of the big hit game state. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 12 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (step S231). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special figure game is put on hold. For example, in the process of step S231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure hold storage number is other than “0” in step S231 (step S231; No), the second special figure hold storage unit 151B stores the hold corresponding to the hold number “1”. As data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value by 1, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number is updated by 1 and the second special figure reserved memory is also updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry in the unit 151B. (Step S233). Further, in the process of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S235). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure game is put on hold. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. That's fine.

  As described above, since the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure holding memory number is “0”, the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed. When the figure game is put on hold, the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game. It should be noted that the second special figure game is not limited to being executed in preference to the first special figure game, and the game ball enters (passes through) the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening). ) And the special game (first special game, second special game) may be executed in the order in which the start prizes (first start prize, second start prize) are generated. In this case, it is only necessary to provide a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated, and to determine which of the first special game and the second special game is to be executed from the stored data.

  When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S235 (step S235; No), the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A stores the storage corresponding to the reservation number “1”. As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the process of step S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) in the unit 151A is shifted upward by one entry. (Step S237). Further, in the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S234 and S238, as a usage table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result, is “big hit” or “losing”. Similarly to the process of step S402 shown in FIG. 15A, the data of the display result determination table is set (step S239). When different display result determination tables (first special figure display result determination table, second special figure display result determination table) are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, in the process of step S402, the start port buffer is used. The value (“1” or “2”) is referred to, but in the process of step S239, the variable special figure designation buffer value (“1” or “2”) may be referred to.

  Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the decided values assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit” and “losing”. Then, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “lost” (step S240).

  After determining the special figure display result in step S240, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S241). If it is determined that the game is a “hit” (step S241; Yes), the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to an on state (step S242). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S243). By referring to the big hit type determination table 131 set in this way, numerical data indicating the big hit type determination random number value MR2 stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is changed to “16R probability variation”, “2R probability variation (surprise probability)”, Depending on which of the determined values assigned to each jackpot type of “2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion)”, which of the multiple jackpot types is determined is determined (step S244).

  Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the big hit type is “16R probability change”, the big hit type buffer value is “1”, and if “2R probability change (surprise)”, the big hit type buffer value is “2” and “2R probability change → 16R probability change ( Promotion) ”, the jackpot type buffered value may be“ 3 ”.

  If it is determined in step S241 that it is not a “hit” (step S241; No), or after executing any of the processes in step S245, the result of a prior decision as to whether or not to control the big win gaming state, In response to the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state, a confirmed special symbol is set (step S248).

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . In step S235, when the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step S250), the special symbol is set. Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  In the variation pattern setting process in step S111, the CPU 103 determines the random value MR3 for determining the variation category and the variation pattern for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the random value MR5 is extracted.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S111 in FIG. 12 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process illustrated in FIG. 19, the CPU 103 determines the variation category, similarly to step S <b> 412 illustrated in FIG. 15A (step S <b> 261). In the process of step S261, the CPU 103 has already been extracted at the time of winning (step S217 in FIG. 14), and stored as hold data in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A (or the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B). The variation category may be determined using the random number MR3 for determining the variation category.

  Further, when determining the variation category using any variation category determination table corresponding to the number of reserved memories, for example, when the current gaming state is the low probability low base state, the CPU 103 performs the process of step S261. The variation category determination table shown in FIG. 17 (A) corresponding to the number of reserved memories at the time of execution is selected. Further, when determining a variation category using any variation category determination table corresponding to the number of reserved memories, for example, the current gaming state is a highly accurate base state, and the remaining number of advantageous states is a specific number (for example, , 50 times) or more, the CPU 103 selects the variable category determination table shown in FIG. 17B corresponding to the number of reserved storage at the time of execution of the process of step S261. Further, when determining a variation category using any variation category determination table corresponding to the number of reserved memories, for example, the current gaming state is a highly accurate base state, and the remaining number of advantageous states is a specific number (for example, , 50 times), the CPU 103 selects the variable category determination table shown in FIG. 17C corresponding to the number of reserved storage at the time of execution of the process of step S261.

  Note that, as described above, when there is a determination value of the random value MR3 corresponding to the same variation category in any of the variation category determination tables corresponding to the number of reserved memories, it corresponds to the same variation category. When the random number MR3 that matches the determination value is extracted at the time of winning, the number of reserved memories is different between when the winning random number determination process (step 202) is executed and when the variation pattern setting process (step S111) is executed. Even if they are greatly different, the variation pattern setting process determines the same variation category as the winning random number determination process. For example, in the specific examples of the variable category determination tables “C-TBL1A” to “C-TBL3A” and “C-TBL1C” to “C-TBL3C” described above, the random number MR3 extracted at the time of winning is, for example, “99”. If so, the variation category “PA5” is determined in both the winning random number determination process and the variation pattern setting process regardless of the number of stored storage. Also, if the random number MR3 extracted at the time of winning is in the range of “97” to “98”, for example, the variation category “PA4” regardless of the number of reserved memories, both in the winning random number determination processing and the variation pattern setting processing. Is determined. In the process of step S261, it is preferable to determine the variation category using the variation category determination random value MR3 stored as the pending data, but the CPU 103 newly determines the variation category determination random value. MR3 may be extracted and the variation category may be determined using the newly extracted random value MR3 for determining the variation category.

  Subsequent to the process of step S261, a variation pattern corresponding to the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern is determined (step S262). In the process of step S262, the CPU 103 first selects one of the variation pattern determination tables from a plurality of types of variation pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 101.

  Specifically, when the current gaming state is the low probability low base state, that is, the normal gaming state in step S261, and the variation category “PA1” is determined, the CPU 103 causes the game state to be as shown in FIG. 20A (A). A variation pattern determination table is selected in which a variation pattern (variation pattern “PA1-1”) is determined at a certain determination ratio. That is, for 100 possible values (100 from “0” to “99” shown in FIG. 4) of the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, 100 variations are assigned to the variation pattern “PA1-1”. Select the pattern determination table. Further, when the current gaming state is the low probability low base state, that is, the normal gaming state in step S261, and the variation category “PA2” is determined, the CPU 103 determines the determination rate as shown in FIG. 20A (B). To select a variation pattern determination table in which variation patterns (variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3”) are determined. That is, for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, 40 are allocated to the variation pattern “PA2-1”, 30 are allocated to the variation pattern “PA2-2”, and the variation pattern “PA2” is allocated. -3 ”is selected, the variation pattern determination table is selected.

  Similarly, when the current gaming state is the low probability low base state, that is, the normal gaming state in step S261, and the variation category “PA3” is determined, the variation occurs at a determination rate as shown in FIG. 20A (C). A variation pattern determination table in which patterns (variation patterns “PA3-1” to “PA3-2”) are determined is selected. In step S261, the current gaming state is a low probability low base state, that is, a normal gaming state, and the variation When the category “PA4” is determined, a variation pattern determination table in which variation patterns (variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-5”) are determined at a determination ratio as illustrated in FIG. In step S261, the current gaming state is the low probability low base state, that is, the normal gaming state, and the variation category “PA5” is determined. Case, selects the variation pattern determination table variation pattern (movement pattern "PA5-1" - "PA5-5") is determined by determining the ratio as shown in FIG. 20A (E).

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the low probability low base state, when the big hit (16R probability variation) is determined in step S244 in FIG. 18 (that is, “1” indicating “16R probability variation” in the big hit type buffer value). If the variation category “PB3” is determined in step S261, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern (the variation pattern “1” as shown in FIG. 20A (F)). PB3-1 ”to“ PB3-2 ”) are selected. That is, for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, a variation pattern determination table in which 20 are allocated to the variation pattern “PB3-1” and 80 are allocated to the variation pattern “PB3-2”. Select.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the low probability low base, if the big hit (16R probability variation) is determined in step S244 in FIG. 18 (that is, “1” indicating “16R probability variation” in the big hit type buffer value) If the variation category “PB4” is determined in step S261, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern (the variation pattern “PB4” at the determination rate as shown in FIG. 20A (G). -1 "to" PB4-4 ") is selected. That is, for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, 25 are allocated to the variation pattern “PB4-1”, 25 are allocated to the variation pattern “PB4-2”, and the variation pattern “PB4” is allocated. -3 ”is assigned 25, and the variation pattern determination table in which 25 is assigned to the variation pattern“ PB4-4 ”is selected.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the low probability low base, if the big hit (16R probability variation) is determined in step S244 in FIG. 18 (that is, “1” indicating “16R probability variation” in the big hit type buffer value). If the variation category “PB5” is determined in step S261, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern (the variation pattern “PB5” at the determination rate as shown in FIG. 20A (H). -1 "to" PB5-4 ") is selected. That is, for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern, 20 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern “PB5-1”, 20 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern “PB5-2”, and the fluctuation pattern “PB5” is assigned. -3 "is assigned 30, and a variation pattern determination table is selected in which 30 is assigned to the variation pattern" PB5-4 ".

  Similarly, when the current gaming state is a low probability low base, the big hit (2R probability variation (surprise)) is determined in step S244 in FIG. 18, and the variation category “PC2” is determined in step S261. Is determined, a variation pattern determination table is selected in which variation patterns (variation patterns “PC2-1” to “PC2-3”) are determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG. 20A (I). That is, of the 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, 25 are allocated to the variation pattern “PC2-1”, 50 are allocated to the variation pattern “PC2-2”, and the variation pattern “PC2” is allocated. -3 "is selected, the variation pattern determination table assigned 25.

  Further, when the current gaming state is a low probability low base, the big hit (2R probability variation (surprise probability)) is determined in step S244 in FIG. 18, and the variation category “PC3” is determined in step S261. If it is determined, a variation pattern determination table is selected in which variation patterns (variation patterns “PC3-1” to “PC3-2”) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 20A (J). That is, for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, a variation pattern determination table in which 50 are allocated to the variation pattern “PC3-1” and 50 are allocated to the variation pattern “PC3-2”. Select.

  Further, when the current gaming state is the low probability low base, the big hit (2R probability variation (surprise)) is determined in step S244 in FIG. 18, and the variation category “PC4” is determined in step S261. If it is determined, a variation pattern determination table is selected in which variation patterns (variation patterns “PC4-1” to “PC4-5”) are determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG. 20A (K). That is, of the 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, 25 are allocated to the variation pattern “PC4-1”, 25 are allocated to the variation pattern “PC4-2”, and the variation pattern “PC4” is allocated. -3 ”is assigned 25, and the variation pattern determination table in which 25 is assigned to the variation pattern“ PC4-4 ”is selected.

  Further, when the current gaming state is a low probability low base, a big hit (2R probability variation (surprise)) is determined in step S244 in FIG. 18, and the variation category “PC5” is determined in step S261. If it is determined, a variation pattern determination table is selected in which variation patterns (variation patterns “PC5-1” to “PC5-5”) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 20A (L). That is, of the 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, 25 are allocated to the variation pattern “PC5-1”, 25 are allocated to the variation pattern “PC5-2”, and the variation pattern “PC5” is allocated. -3 ”is allocated to 25, and the variation pattern determination table in which 25 is allocated to variation pattern“ PC5-4 ”is selected.

  Further, when the current gaming state is a low probability low base, a big hit (2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion)) is determined in step S244 in FIG. 18, and the variation category “ When “PD2” is determined, a variation pattern determination table in which variation patterns (variation patterns “PD2-1” to “PD2-3”) are determined at a determination ratio as illustrated in FIG. 20A (M) is selected. . That is, for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern, 30 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern “PD2-1”, 30 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern “PD2-2”, and the fluctuation pattern “PD2” is assigned. -3 "is selected, the variation pattern determination table assigned 40 is selected.

  Further, when the current gaming state is a low probability low base, it is a big hit (2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion)) in step S244 in FIG. 18, and the variation category “PD3” is determined in step S261. In such a case, a variation pattern determination table in which variation patterns (variation patterns “PD3-1” to “PD3-2”) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 20A (N) is selected. That is, a variation pattern determination table in which 20 determination values are allocated to the variation pattern “PD3-1” and 80 are allocated to the variation pattern “PD3-2” for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern. Select.

  Further, when the current gaming state is a low probability low base, a big hit (2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion)) is determined in step S244 in FIG. 18, and the variation category “ When “PD4” is determined, a variation pattern determination table in which variation patterns (variation patterns “PD4-1” to “PCD-5”) are determined at a determination ratio as illustrated in FIG. 20A (O) is selected. . That is, for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, 25 are allocated to the variation pattern “PD4-1”, 25 are allocated to the variation pattern “PD4-2”, and the variation pattern “PD4” is allocated. -3 ”is assigned 25, and the variation pattern determination table in which 25 is assigned to the variation pattern“ PD4-4 ”is selected.

  Further, when the current gaming state is a low probability low base, a big hit (2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion)) is determined in step S244 in FIG. 18, and the variation category “ When “PD5” is determined, a variation pattern determination table is selected in which variation patterns (variation patterns “PD5-1” to “PD5-5”) are determined at a determination ratio as illustrated in FIG. 20A (P). . That is, of the 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, 20 are allocated to the variation pattern “PD5-1”, 20 are allocated to the variation pattern “PD5-2”, and the variation pattern “PD5” is allocated. -3 ”is assigned 30, and the variation pattern determination table in which 30 is assigned to variation pattern“ PD5-4 ”is selected.

  Also, in step S261, when the current gaming state is a high-probability base state and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time reduction control or probability variation control) is equal to or greater than a specific number, the variation category “PA1” is determined. In such a case, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern determination table in which a variation pattern (variation pattern “PA1-1”) is determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG. That is, for 100 possible values (100 from “0” to “99” shown in FIG. 4) of the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, 100 variations are assigned to the variation pattern “PA1-1”. Select the pattern determination table. Also, in step S261, when the current gaming state is a highly accurate and high base state, and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time reduction control or probability variation control) is equal to or greater than a specific number, the variation category “PA2” is determined. In such a case, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern determination table in which variation patterns (variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3”) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 20B (B). That is, for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, 40 are allocated to the variation pattern “PA2-1”, 30 are allocated to the variation pattern “PA2-2”, and the variation pattern “PA2” is allocated. -3 ”is selected, the variation pattern determination table is selected.

  In step S261, when the current gaming state is a highly accurate and high base state, and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time reduction control or probability variation control) is equal to or greater than a specific number, the variation category “PA3” is determined. There is nothing. In other words, when the current gaming state is a high-accuracy and high-base state and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time reduction control or probability variation control) is greater than or equal to a specific number of times, any one of a plurality of reach modes is established. Then, the 16R probability change is confirmed. Therefore, when “losing” is set, the normal reach (losing) variation pattern determination table is not selected. Similarly, in step S261, when the current gaming state is a highly accurate and high base state, and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time reduction control or probability variation control) is equal to or greater than a specific number, the variation category “PA4” is determined. Never happen. Similarly, when the current gaming state is a high-accuracy and high-base state and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time reduction control or probability variation control) is equal to or greater than a specific number in step S261, the variation category “PA5” is determined. Never happen.

  Further, when the current gaming state is a highly accurate and high base state, and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time-saving control or probability variation control) is equal to or greater than a specific number, a big hit (16R probability variation) in step S244 in FIG. Is determined (that is, when “1” indicating “16R probability change” is stored in the jackpot type buffer value) and the variation category “PB3” is determined in step S261. The CPU 103 selects a variation pattern determination table in which variation patterns (variation patterns “PB3-1” to “PB3-2”) are determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG. 20B (F). That is, for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, a variation pattern determination table in which 20 are allocated to the variation pattern “PB3-1” and 80 are allocated to the variation pattern “PB3-2”. Select.

  Further, when the current gaming state is a highly accurate and high base state, and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time-saving control or probability variation control) is equal to or greater than a specific number, a big hit (16R probability variation) in step S244 in FIG. Is determined (that is, when “1” indicating “16R probability change” is stored in the jackpot type buffer value) and the variation category “PB4” is determined in step S261. The CPU 103 selects a variation pattern determination table in which variation patterns (variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-4”) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 20B (G). That is, for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, 25 are allocated to the variation pattern “PB4-1”, 25 are allocated to the variation pattern “PB4-2”, and the variation pattern “PB4” is allocated. -3 ”is assigned 25, and the variation pattern determination table in which 25 is assigned to the variation pattern“ PB4-4 ”is selected.

  Further, when the current gaming state is a highly accurate and high base state, and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time-saving control or probability variation control) is equal to or greater than a specific number, a big hit (16R probability variation) in step S244 in FIG. Is determined (that is, when “1” indicating “16R probability change” is stored in the jackpot type buffer value) and the variation category “PB5” is determined in step S261. The CPU 103 selects a variation pattern determination table in which variation patterns (variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-4”) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. That is, for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern, 20 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern “PB5-1”, 20 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern “PB5-2”, and the fluctuation pattern “PB5” is assigned. -3 "is assigned 30, and a variation pattern determination table is selected in which 30 is assigned to the variation pattern" PB5-4 ".

  Similarly, when the current gaming state is a high-accuracy and high-base state and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, short-time control or probability variation control) is equal to or greater than a specific number, a big hit (2R probability variation) is performed in step S244 in FIG. (Sudden accuracy)) is determined, and when the variation category “PC2” is determined in step S261, the variation pattern (variation pattern “PC2” is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 20B (I). −1 ”to“ PC2-3 ”) is selected. That is, for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, 30 are allocated to the variation pattern “PC2-1”, 40 are allocated to the variation pattern “PC2-2”, and the variation pattern “PC2” is allocated. -3 ”is selected, the variation pattern determination table is selected.

Note that when the current gaming state is a high-accuracy and high-base state and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time reduction control or probability variation control) is equal to or greater than a specific number, the variation category “PC3” is not determined. . In other words, when the current gaming state is a high-accuracy and high-base state and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time reduction control or probability variation control) is greater than or equal to a specific number of times, any one of a plurality of reach modes is established. Then, the 16R probability change is confirmed. Therefore, when “losing” is set, the normal reach (losing) variation pattern determination table is not selected.
Similarly, when the current gaming state is a high-accuracy and high-base state and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, short-time control or probability variation control) is equal to or greater than a specific number, a big hit (2R probability variation (surprise)) is determined. In this case, the variation category “PC4” is not determined. Similarly, when the current gaming state is a high-accuracy and high-base state and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, short-time control or probability variation control) is equal to or greater than a specific number, a big hit (2R probability variation (surprise)) is determined. In this case, the variation category “PC5” is not determined.

  Further, when the current gaming state is a high-accuracy and high-base state and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time reduction control or probability variation control) is equal to or greater than a specific number, a big hit (2R probability variation → 16R) in step S244 in FIG. When the probability change (promotion) is determined and the variation category “PD2” is determined in step S261, the variation pattern (variation pattern “ The variation pattern determination table in which “PD2-1” to “PD2-3”) is determined is selected. That is, for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern, 30 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern “PD2-1”, 30 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern “PD2-2”, and the fluctuation pattern “PD2” is assigned. -3 "is selected, the variation pattern determination table assigned 40 is selected.

  Note that when the current gaming state is a high-accuracy and high-base state and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time reduction control or probability variation control) is equal to or greater than a specific number, a big hit (2R probability variation → 16R) in step S244 in FIG. When the probability change (promotion) is determined, the variation category “PD3” is not determined in step S261. In other words, when the current gaming state is a high-accuracy and high-base state and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time reduction control or probability variation control) is greater than or equal to a specific number of times, any one of a plurality of reach modes is established. Then, the 16R probability change is confirmed. Therefore, when “losing” is set, the normal reach (losing) variation pattern determination table is not selected. Similarly, when the current gaming state is a high-accuracy and high-base state and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time reduction control or probability variation control) is equal to or greater than a specific number, a big hit (2R probability variation → When the 16R probability change (promotion) is determined, the variation category “PD4” is not determined. Similarly, when the current gaming state is a high-accuracy and high-base state and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time reduction control or probability variation control) is equal to or greater than a specific number, a big hit (2R probability variation → When the 16R probability change (promotion) is determined, the variation category “PD5” is not determined in step S261.

  In step S261, when the current gaming state is a highly accurate and high base state, and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time reduction control or probability variation control) is less than a specific number, the variation category “PA1” is determined. In such a case, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern determination table in which a variation pattern (variation pattern “PA1-1”) is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. That is, for 100 possible values (100 from “0” to “99” shown in FIG. 4) of the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, 100 variations are assigned to the variation pattern “PA1-1”. Select the pattern determination table.

  Also, in step S261, when the current gaming state is the high-probability high-base state and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time reduction control or probability variation control) is less than the specific number, the CPU 103 causes the CPU 103 to A variation pattern determination table in which variation patterns (variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3”) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. That is, for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, 40 are allocated to the variation pattern “PA2-1”, 30 are allocated to the variation pattern “PA2-2”, and the variation pattern “PA2” is allocated. -3 ”is selected, the variation pattern determination table is selected.

  Similarly, in step S261, when the current gaming state is a high-probability high-base state and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time reduction control or probability variation control) is less than a specific number, the variation category “PA3” is determined. If it is determined, a variation pattern determination table in which variation patterns (variation patterns “PA3-1” to “PA3-2”) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 20C (C) is selected, and in step S261 When the current gaming state is a high-accuracy and high-base state and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, short-time control or probability-variable control) is less than a specific number, when the variation category “PA4” is determined, A variation pattern determination table in which variation patterns (variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-5”) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 20C (D) is selected. In step S261, when the current gaming state is the high-accuracy and high-base state and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, the time reduction control or the probability variation control) is less than the specific number, the variation category “PA5” is determined. In this case, a variation pattern determination table is selected in which variation patterns (variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-5”) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG.

  Further, when the current gaming state is a high-accuracy and high-base state and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time-saving control or probability variation control) is less than a specific number, a big hit (16R probability variation) in step S244 in FIG. Is determined (that is, when “1” indicating “16R probability change” is stored in the jackpot type buffer value) and the variation category “PB3” is determined in step S261. The CPU 103 selects a variation pattern determination table in which variation patterns (variation patterns “PB3-1” to “PB3-2”) are determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG. That is, for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, a variation pattern determination table in which 20 are allocated to the variation pattern “PB3-1” and 80 are allocated to the variation pattern “PB3-2”. Select.

  Further, when the current gaming state is a high-accuracy and high-base state and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time-saving control or probability variation control) is less than a specific number, a big hit (16R probability variation) in step S244 in FIG. Is determined (that is, when “1” indicating “16R probability change” is stored in the big hit type buffer value) and the variation category “PB4” is determined in step S261. The CPU 103 selects a variation pattern determination table in which variation patterns (variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-4”) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 20C (G). That is, for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, 25 are allocated to the variation pattern “PB4-1”, 25 are allocated to the variation pattern “PB4-2”, and the variation pattern “PB4” is allocated. -3 ”is assigned 25, and the variation pattern determination table in which 25 is assigned to the variation pattern“ PB4-4 ”is selected.

  Further, when the current gaming state is a high-accuracy and high-base state and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time-saving control or probability variation control) is less than a specific number, a big hit (16R probability variation) in step S244 in FIG. Is determined (that is, when “1” indicating “16R probability change” is stored in the jackpot type buffer value) and the variation category “PB5” is determined in step S261. The CPU 103 selects a variation pattern determination table in which variation patterns (variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-4”) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. That is, for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern, 20 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern “PB5-1”, 20 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern “PB5-2”, and the fluctuation pattern “PB5” is assigned. -3 "is assigned 30, and a variation pattern determination table is selected in which 30 is assigned to the variation pattern" PB5-4 ".

  Similarly, when the current gaming state is a high-accuracy and high-base state and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, short-time control or probability variation control) is less than a specific number, a big hit (2R probability variation) in step S244 in FIG. (Sudden accuracy)) is determined, and when the variation category “PC2” is determined in step S261, the variation pattern (variation pattern “PC2” is determined at the determination rate shown in FIG. 20C (I). −1 ”to“ PC2-3 ”) is selected. That is, for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, 20 are allocated to the variation pattern “PC2-1”, 60 are allocated to the variation pattern “PC2-2”, and the variation pattern “PC2” is allocated. -3 ”is selected, the variation pattern determination table is selected.

  Further, when the current gaming state is a highly accurate and high base state, and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time-saving control or probability variation control) is less than a specific number, a big hit (2R probability variation (2R probability variation ( If the variation category “PC3” is determined in step S261, the variation pattern (the variation pattern “PC3−” is determined at the determination rate shown in FIG. 20C (J). 1 ”to“ PC3-2 ”) is selected. That is, for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, a variation pattern determination table in which 80 are allocated to the variation pattern “PC3-1” and 20 are allocated to the variation pattern “PC3-2”. Select.

  Further, when the current gaming state is a highly accurate and high base state, and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time-saving control or probability variation control) is less than a specific number, a big hit (2R probability variation (2R probability variation ( If the variation category “PC4” is determined in step S261, the variation pattern (variation pattern “PC4−” is determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG. 20C (K)). 1 ”to“ PC4-5 ”) is selected. That is, of the 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, 25 are allocated to the variation pattern “PC4-1”, 25 are allocated to the variation pattern “PC4-2”, and the variation pattern “PC4” is allocated. -3 ”is assigned 25, and the variation pattern determination table in which 25 is assigned to the variation pattern“ PC4-4 ”is selected.

  Further, when the current gaming state is a highly accurate and high base state, and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time-saving control or probability variation control) is less than a specific number, a big hit (2R probability variation (2R probability variation ( If the variation category “PC5” is determined in step S261, the variation pattern (the variation pattern “PC5−” is determined at the determination rate shown in FIG. 20C (L)). 1 ”to“ PC5-5 ”) is selected. That is, for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, 30 are allocated to the variation pattern “PC5-1”, 30 are allocated to the variation pattern “PC5-2”, and the variation pattern “PC5” is allocated. -3 "is assigned 20 and the variation pattern determination table is selected with 20 variation patterns" PC5-4 "assigned.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is a high-accuracy and high-base state and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time reduction control or probability variation control) is less than a specific number, a big hit (2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion)) is determined, and when the variation category “PD2” is determined in step S261, the variation pattern (variation pattern) is determined at a determination rate as illustrated in FIG. “PD2-1” to “PD2-3”) are selected. That is, for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, 20 are allocated to the variation pattern “PD2-1”, 20 are allocated to the variation pattern “PD2-2”, and the variation pattern “PD2” is allocated. -3 "is selected, the variation pattern determination table 60 is selected.

  When the current gaming state is a high-accuracy and high-base state and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, short-time control or probability variation control) is less than a specific number, a big hit (2R probability variation → 16R probability variation) in FIG. (Promotion)), and when the variation category “PD3” is determined in step S261, variation patterns (variation patterns “PD3-1” to “PD3”) are determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG. PD-3-2 ") is selected as the variation pattern determination table. That is, a variation pattern determination table in which 20 determination values are allocated to the variation pattern “PD3-1” and 80 are allocated to the variation pattern “PD3-2” for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern. Select.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is a high-accuracy and high-base state and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time reduction control or probability variation control) is less than a specific number, a big hit (2R probability variation → 16R probability change (promotion)) is determined, and if the variation category “PD4” is determined in step S261, the variation pattern (variation pattern) is determined at a decision rate as shown in FIG. 20C (O). “PD4-1” to “PCD-5”) are selected. That is, for 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, 10 are allocated to the variation pattern “PD4-1”, 20 are allocated to the variation pattern “PD4-2”, and the variation pattern “PD4” is allocated. -3 "is assigned 30, and a variation pattern determination table is selected in which 40 is assigned to the variation pattern" PD4-4 ".

  In addition, when the current gaming state is a high-accuracy and high-base state and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time reduction control or probability variation control) is less than a specific number, a big hit (2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion)) is determined, and when the variation category “PD5” is determined in step S261, the variation pattern (variation pattern) is determined at a decision rate as shown in FIG. 20C (P). “PD5-1” to “PD5-5”) are selected. That is, of the 100 determination values that can be taken by the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, 20 are allocated to the variation pattern “PD5-1”, 20 are allocated to the variation pattern “PD5-2”, and the variation pattern “PD5” is allocated. -3 ”is assigned 30, and the variation pattern determination table in which 30 is assigned to variation pattern“ PD5-4 ”is selected.

  Subsequently, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154, and selects it as described above. Any variation pattern is determined by determining whether there is numerical data indicating the extracted random number MR5 for variation pattern in the variation pattern determination range in the variation pattern determination table.

  Then, the special figure fluctuation time according to the determination result (determination result) by the process of step S262 is set (step S263). Thereafter, a setting for starting the change of the special symbol is performed so as to start either the first special figure game or the second special figure game in accordance with the variable special figure designation buffer value (step S264). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

  After the process of step S264 is performed, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the special symbol variable display are performed (step S265). The various commands set in this way are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example, by executing the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. . Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step S266), and then the variation pattern setting processing is terminated.

  Note that, as described above, when there is a determination value of the random value MR3 corresponding to the same variation category in any of the variation category determination tables corresponding to the number of reserved memories, it corresponds to the same variation category. When the random number MR3 that matches the determination value is extracted at the time of winning a prize, the number of reserved memories is different between when the winning random number determination process (step S220) is executed and when the variation pattern setting process (step S111) is executed. Even if they are greatly different, the variation pattern setting process determines the same variation category as the winning random number determination process. For example, in the specific examples of the variable category determination tables “C-TBL1A” to “C-TBL3A” and “C-TBL1C” to “C-TBL3C” described above, the random number MR3 extracted at the time of winning is, for example, “99”. If so, the variation category “PA5” is determined in both the winning random number determination process and the variation pattern setting process regardless of the number of stored storage. Also, if the random number MR3 extracted at the time of winning is in the range of “97” to “98”, for example, the variation category “PA4” regardless of the number of reserved memories, both in the winning random number determination processing and the variation pattern setting processing. Is determined. In the process of step S261, it is preferable to determine the variation category using the variation category determination random value MR3 stored as the pending data. However, the CPU 103 newly determines the variation category determination random value MR3. The variation category may be determined by using the extracted random number MR3 for determining the variation category that has been extracted.

  20A, 20B, and 20C are diagrams illustrating setting examples of the variation pattern determination ratio. It is assumed that the ROM 101 stores 16 types of variation pattern determination tables corresponding to the variation category according to the remaining number of game states and advantageous states. FIG. 20A (A) is selected when the current gaming state is the low probability low base state, that is, the normal gaming state among the 16 types described above, and the variation category is “PA1 (shortening / non-reach lose)”. This is an example of setting the variation pattern determination ratio by the variation pattern determination table. FIG. 20A (B) is selected when the current gaming state is the low probability low base state, that is, the normal gaming state among the 16 types described above, and is in the variation category “PA2 (non-reach (losing))”. It is an example of setting the determination ratio of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination table. FIG. 20A (C) is selected when the current gaming state is the low probability low base state, that is, the normal gaming state among the 16 types described above, and the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (losing))”. This is an example of setting the variation pattern determination ratio by the variation pattern determination table. The same applies to FIGS. 20A (D) to 20A (P).

  FIG. 20B (A) shows that among the above 16 types, the current gaming state is a highly accurate and high base state, and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, short-time control or probability variation control) is a specific number of times or more, It is a setting example of the determination ratio of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA1 (shortening / non-reach loss)”. FIG. 20B (B) shows that the current gaming state is a highly accurate and high base state among the 16 types described above, and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, short-time control or probability changing control) is a specific number of times or more. This is a setting example of a variation pattern determination ratio based on a variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA2 (non-reach (loss))”. FIG. 20B (C) shows that among the above 16 types, the current gaming state is a highly accurate and high base state, and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time reduction control or probability variation control) is a specific number of times or more. This is a setting example of a variation pattern determination ratio based on a variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))”. The same applies to FIGS. 20B (D) to 20B (P).

  FIG. 20C (A) shows that the current gaming state is a highly accurate and high base state among the 16 types described above, and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, short-time control or probability changing control) is less than a specific number of times, It is a setting example of the determination ratio of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA1 (shortening / non-reach loss)”. FIG. 20C (B) shows that the current gaming state is a highly accurate and high base state among the 16 types described above, and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, short-time control or probability changing control) is less than a specific number of times, This is a setting example of a variation pattern determination ratio based on a variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA2 (non-reach (loss))”. FIG. 20C (C) shows that among the 16 types described above, the current gaming state is a highly accurate and high base state, and the remaining number of advantageous states (for example, time-saving control or probability changing control) is less than a specific number of times, This is a setting example of a variation pattern determination ratio based on a variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))”. The same applies to FIGS. 20C (D) to 20C (P).

  20B and 20C, when the remaining number of advantageous states is equal to or greater than the specific number, that is, in the setting example of FIG. 20B, a plurality of reach variation patterns, for example, variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3- 2, PA4-1 to PA4-4, PA5-1 to PA5-4, PB3-1 to PB3-1, PB4-1 to PB4-4, PB5-1 to PB5-4, PC3-1 to PC3-2, Among PC4-1 to PC4-4, PC5-1 to PC5-4, PD3-1 to PD3-2, PD4-1 to PD4-4, PD5-1 to PD5-4, The reach variation pattern is selected only when the big hit type is 16R probability variation, and only when the big hit type is 16R probability variation, the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-1, PB4- 1 to P 4-4, one of the PB5-1~PB5-4 is selected.

  That is, in the setting example of FIG. 20B, the variation pattern that causes reach loss is not selected, and other than the case of 16R probability variation, for example, loss, 2R probability variation (surprise accuracy), 2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion). In this case, only one of the non-reach (losing) fluctuation pattern and the non-reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern is selected.

In the setting example of FIG. 20B, when the big hit is a big hit type and the 2R probability variation (crash probability), only one of the variation patterns PC2-1 to PC2-3 corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern is detected. Selected. In other words, in the case of 2R probability variation (surprising accuracy), the ratio of selecting the non-reach variation pattern is set to be higher than the reach variation pattern.
In the setting example of FIG. 20B, in the case of 2R probability variation (surprising accuracy), among the non-reach variation patterns PC2-1 to PC2-3, variation accompanied by slip corresponding to reach reach production (also referred to as reach rise effect). The variation pattern PC2-2, which is a pattern, is set so that the ratio of selection is high.

In the setting example of FIG. 20B, when the big hit type is the big hit type and the 2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion), any of the variation patterns PD2-1 to PD2-3 corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern. Only is selected. In other words, in the case of 2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion), the ratio of selecting the non-reach variation pattern is set to be higher than the reach variation pattern.
In the setting example of FIG. 20B, in the case of 2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion), among the non-reach variation patterns PD2-1 to PD2-3, a variation pattern PD2- that is a variation pattern with one pseudo continuous variation. 3 is set so that the ratio of selection is high.

  As described above, in the setting example of FIG. 20B, the ratio selected when the 2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion) is selected in the non-reach variation pattern, for example, in the case of a non-reach variation pattern with pseudo continuous variation. In the case of a non-reach variation pattern with slipping, which is set to be higher than the ratio selected from 16R probability variation or 2R probability variation (rush accuracy), the ratio selected when 2R probability variation (rush accuracy) is 16R It is set to be higher than the ratio selected when the probability change or 2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion).

  Further, when the remaining number of advantageous states is less than the specific number of times, that is, in the setting example of FIG. 20C, the ratio of selecting a variation pattern that requires a long variation time is higher than in the setting example of FIG. 20B. Is set. That is, in the setting example of FIG. 20C, the rate of selection of a variation pattern with a late timing for notifying that it is a big hit is higher than in the setting example of FIG. 20B. In the case of the setting example in FIG. 20C, since a variation pattern that requires a long variation time is easily selected as described above, a variation pattern with a slow notification timing for notifying that reach or reach loss is selected is high. It is set to be.

  As described above, in the main board 11, in the start winning determination process in step S101, transmission setting for transmitting the start opening winning designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed to the effect control board 12 ( In step S219), transmission setting for transmitting the symbol designation command according to the special symbol display result determined in step S403 or the like is performed (step S410), and the variation category command corresponding to the variation category determined in step S412 Is set for transmitting (step S413), and transmission setting for transmitting the pending storage number notification command is performed (step S221).

  After these processes are executed, the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 11 is executed, so that the game ball passes (enters) through the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening). When the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, a start opening prize designation command (first start opening prize designation command or second start opening prize designation command), symbol designation command, variable category command, and reserved memory number notification Four commands called commands (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command) are transmitted as a set in one timer interrupt.

  In the main board 11, in the special symbol normal processing in step S110, a fixed special symbol that becomes a variable symbol display result of the special symbol using the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, or the like. In the variation pattern setting process of step S111, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern using the current gaming state and the remaining number of advantageous states, the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, etc. Is determined.

Further, in the variation pattern setting process of step S111, a variable display result notification command for designating the confirmed special symbol determined as described above, a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative symbol determined as described above, and the like. Transmission settings for transmission to the effect control board 12 are performed. When the variable display is started by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 11 after these processes are executed, the variable display result notification command, the variation pattern designation command, and the like are included in one timer interrupt. Sent in bulk.
Note that the commands are not limited to those that are transmitted all at once in one timer interrupt, and commands may be sequentially transmitted one by one by the command control process in step S17 for each timer interrupt.

  That is, at the timing when the special symbol or decorative symbol variable display is started, the special symbol normal processing (step S110) is performed, and the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set to “big hit” to control the big hit gaming state. In the variation pattern setting process (step S111), a specific variable display mode (variation pattern) of the decorative symbols is determined, and the contents determined by each effect control command are determined. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Prior to this, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening), the winning random number value determination process (step S220) determines “big hit”. Determination of whether or not the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state, determination of a general variable display mode (fluctuation category) of the decorative design, etc. are performed, and the contents determined by each presentation control command are transmitted to the presentation control board 12 Is done.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of FIG.
In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 21, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S291). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S291; YES), the CPU 103 sets a big hit start time waiting time (step S292). For example, in the process of step S 292, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit start presentation waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S292, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start specifying command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start specifying command is stored in the buffer specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. It only has to be stored in the area. Thereafter, the CPU 103 clears the big hit flag and turns it off (step S294). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the big hit release pre-processing (step S295), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S291 (step S291; NO), the CPU 103 performs a gaming state transition process at variation (step S296). For example, in the game state transition process at the time of change in step S296, a process for clearing one or both of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to turn off, The value of the variation counter for counting the number of executions of the special figure game is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 or adding 1, and the value of the updated variation number counter is a predetermined special gaming state end determination value. It is only necessary to execute processing for determining whether or not the values match, processing for clearing the value of the variation counter, and the like. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, the CPU 103 ends the probability change state or the time reduction state by clearing the probability change flag or the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 and turning it off. Then, the gaming state may be controlled. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end determination value, the CPU 103 maintains the state of the probability change flag and the time-short flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, and ends the variation-time game state transition process in step S296. do it.

  Following the processing of step S296, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to “0”, which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S297). After executing the end determination of the probability variation state or the short time state, the special symbol stop process ends.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing gaming state transition process executed in step S296 of FIG.
In FIG. 22, the CPU 103 determines the state of one or both of the probability change flag and the short time flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 and determines whether or not the current game state is the low probability low base state. (Step S451). When both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are in the off state, that is, in the low probability low base state (normal state) (step S451; YES), the CPU 103 ends the variation gaming state transition process as it is. On the other hand, when one or both of the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are in the on state, that is, when the low accuracy high base state, the high accuracy high base state, and the high accuracy low base state are satisfied (step S451; NO), the CPU 103 The value of the variation counter for counting the number of times of execution of the special figure game (ST number, time reduction number) in one or both of the probability variation state and the short time state is updated by, for example, adding 1 (step S452).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S402, the CPU 103 executes the number of executions (ST) of the special game that executes the probability change control set by the game state transition processing after the big hit in step S314 of FIG. (For example, ST 70 times) is read (step S453), and the time reduction control set by the big hit after-hit gaming state transition processing in step S314 of FIG. 23 in the big hit end processing in step S117 of FIG. The number of executions of the special figure game to be executed (also referred to as the number of time reductions) (for example, 70 time reductions) is read (step S454).

  Following the processing of step S454, the CPU 103 determines the state of the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, and determines whether or not the current game state is the probability change state (high probability state), that is, the probability change. It is determined whether or not the flag is on (step S455). When the current game state is a probability change state (high probability state) (step S455; YES), the CPU 103 has the same value as the number of executions of the special-purpose game that executes the probability change control read in step S453. It is determined whether there is, that is, whether the value of the variation counter matches the special gaming state end determination value (step S456). When the value of the variation counter is the same as the number of executions of the special figure game that executes the probability variation control read in step S453, that is, when the value of the variation counter matches the special game state end determination value (step S456; YES), the CPU 103 sets the low probability state by clearing the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 and turning it off (step S457), and ends the probability variation control.

  After the processing of step S457, or when the current gaming state is not the probability variation state (high probability state), that is, when the probability variation flag is off (step S455; NO), or the value of the variation counter is step After one of the processes in the case where it is not the same as the number of executions of the special figure game that executes the probability change control read in S453, that is, the value of the variation counter does not match the special game state end determination value (step S456; NO) The CPU 103 determines the state of the short time flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 and determines whether or not the current game state is the short time state (high base state), that is, the state of the short time flag is ON. It is determined whether or not there is (step S458).

  When the current gaming state is the short time state (high base state) (step S458; YES), the CPU 103 has the same value as the number of executions of the special game that executes the short time control in which the value of the variation counter is read in step S454. It is determined whether there is, that is, whether the value of the variation counter matches the special gaming state end determination value (step S459). When the value of the variation counter is the same as the number of executions of the special-purpose game that executes the short-time control read in step S454, that is, when the value of the variation counter matches the special game state end determination value (step S459; YES), the CPU 103 sets the low base state by clearing the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 and turning it off (step S460), and ends the time reduction control.

  After the processing of step S460, or when the current gaming state is not the time-short state (high base state), that is, when the state of the time-short flag is off (step S458; NO), or the value of the variation counter is step If the number of executions of the special figure game that executes the time-shortening control read in S454 is not the same, that is, if the value of the variation counter does not match the special game state end determination value (step S459; NO) After that, the CPU 103 determines the state of both the probability change flag and the short time flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, and whether or not the current game state is the normal state (low probability low base state), that is, Then, it is determined whether or not the state of the probability variation flag is off and the state of the time reduction flag is off (step S461).

  When the current gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base state), that is, when the probability variation flag is off and the time reduction flag is off (step S461; YES), the CPU 103 performs probability variation control. Is set to “0” (step S462), and the setting value of the number of executions of the special figure game for executing the time reduction control is cleared to “0” (step S463). Further, the value of the variation counter is cleared to “0” (step S464). After such processing is executed, the game state transition processing at the time of variation ends.

  In the present embodiment, when the time reduction count and the ST count (probability variation count) are the same, for example, when both the time reduction count and the ST count are 70, the processes in steps S458 and S459 are omitted. If the current game state is not the probability change state (high probability state), that is, if the state of the probability change flag is OFF (step S455; NO), or the probability change flag provided by the CPU 103 in the game control flag setting unit 152 After performing the process of setting the low-accuracy state by clearing and turning off (step S457), the CPU 103 clears the time-short flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 and turns it off. Thus, the process of setting the low base state (step S460) may be performed.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S117 of FIG.
In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 23, first, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end time effect waiting time has elapsed (step S311). As an example, in the post-hit opening post-processing in step S116 shown in FIG. 12, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit end presentation waiting time Is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S311, the CPU 103 updates, for example, by subtracting 1 from the game control process timer value, and whether the updated game control process timer value matches the predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value. Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed may be determined depending on whether or not. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S311 (step S311; NO), the CPU 103 ends the big hit end processing as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed in step S311 (step S311; YES), the CPU 103 reads the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S311). S312). Subsequent to the process of step S311, the CPU 103 executes a game state transition process after the big hit (step S314). The game state transition process after the big hit is, for example, a setting process for starting the probability variation control or the time reduction control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state.

  After executing the game state transition process after the big hit in step S314, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S316), and then the big hit ends. The process ends.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the post-hit gaming state transition process executed in step S314 of FIG.
In the game state transition process after the big hit shown in FIG. 24, first, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state before the big hit is a time-short state (high base state), that is, whether or not the state of the time-short flag is on. Determination is made (step S601). When the game state before the big hit is not the time-short state (high base state), that is, when the state of the time-short flag is not on (step S601; NO), the CPU 103 turns on the state of the probability variation flag to determine the high probability state (probability variation state). ), The time flag is turned on and the high base state is set (step S602). That is, the process of step S602 is to set the gaming state for starting the probability variation control and the time-shorting control to the high probability high base state in response to the end of the big hit gaming state when the big hit is achieved in the low base state. It is processing of.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S602, the CPU 103 sets the number of executions of the special figure game for executing the probability change control (the number of times of probability change (ST number)) to a predetermined number (for example, 70 times) (step S603). Further, following the process of step ST603, the CPU 103 sets the number of executions of the special-purpose game (time reduction number) for executing the time reduction control to a predetermined number (for example, 70 times) (step S604).

  On the other hand, when the game state before the big hit is the short-time state (high base state), that is, when the short-time flag state is on (step S601; YES), the CPU 103 turns on the probability variation flag state. Then, the high-accuracy state (probability variation state) is set, and the state of the time-short flag is turned on to set the high-base state (step S606). In other words, the processing in step S606 is a big hit in the high base state, for example, a big hit (16R probability variation, 2R probability variation (surprise), 2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion)) during probability variation or time reduction. Furthermore, it is a process for setting the gaming state for starting the probability variation control and the time-shortening control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state to the high probability high base state.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S606, the CPU 103 sets the number of executions of the special figure game (probability change number (ST number)) for executing the probability change control to a predetermined number (for example, 70 times) (step S607). Further, following the process of step S607, the CPU 103 sets the number of executions (time reduction number) of the special-purpose game for executing the time reduction control to a predetermined number (for example, 70 times) (step S608).

  After executing the processing for setting the number of time reductions in steps S604 and S608 to a predetermined number, the value of the variation counter is set to “0” and cleared. After executing such a process, the game state transition process after the big hit ends.

  In this embodiment, when the number of time reductions and the number of STs (probability variation number) are the same, for example, when both the number of time reductions and the number of STs are 70, the game state before the big hit is the time reduction state. Processing for determining whether or not the state of the time reduction flag is on (step S601), the CPU 103 turns on the state of the probability variation flag and determines whether or not the state of the time reduction flag is on (high probability state). Is set to a high base state by turning on the state of the time flag (step S606), and the number of executions of the special game (probability change number (ST number)) for which the CPU 103 executes the probability change control is a predetermined number (for example, , 70 times) (step S607), the number of executions of the special figure game for which the CPU 103 executes the time reduction control (time reduction times) is set to a predetermined number (for example, 70 times). Process (step S608) may be omitted.

  In addition, it may be possible to set the number of hourly times different depending on the state of the hourly flag before the big hit, the big hit type at the time of the big hit gaming state, Depending on the type of jackpot when entering the big hit game state, the number of STs (number of chances of change) may be set differently.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 25 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S72; No), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, control that becomes an effect control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S72 (step S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S73), and command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S74, an effect control process is executed (step S75). In the effect control process in step S75, for example, various effect devices such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speaker 8, a light emission operation in the lamp 9, and a drive operation in the effect model. With respect to the control content of the effect operation using, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 are performed.

  Following the effect control process of step S75, an effect random number update process is executed (step S76), and the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 are used as various random values used for effect control. The numerical data indicating is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S72.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S74 of FIG. 25 as the command analysis process.
In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 26, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a command received from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is (step S501). At this time, if there is no received command (step S501; No), the command analysis processing is terminated.

  If there is a received command in step S501 (step S501; Yes), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start opening prize designation command. (Step S502). If it is the first start opening winning designation command (step S502; Yes), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step S503). For example, in the process of step S503, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. That's fine.

  If the received command is not the first start opening winning designation command in step S502 (step S502; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step S504). If it is the second start opening winning designation command (step S504; Yes), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step S505). For example, in the process of step S505, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

  If it is determined in step S504 that the received command is not the second start opening winning designation command (step S504; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a symbol designation command (step S506). If the received command is not a symbol designating command in step S506 (step S506; No), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step S507). If the received command is not a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step S508). When the command is the first pending storage count notification command (step S508; Yes), the first pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step S509). .

  If the received command is not the first reserved memory number notification command in step S508 (step S508; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved memory number notification command (step S510). When the command is the second pending storage count notification command (step S510; Yes), the second pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step S511). .

  If the received command is a symbol designating command in step S506 (step S506; Yes), the received command is a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; Yes), or steps S503, S505, S509, and S511. After executing any of the above processes, if the first pending storage number notification waiting time is set in the process of step S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command is After storing at the head of the empty area in the reception command buffer 194A at the time of 1 start winning (Step S512), the process returns to Step S501.

  Further, when the received command is a symbol designation command at step S506 (step S506; Yes), when the received command is a variable category command at step S507 (step S507; Yes), or steps S503, S505, S509. After executing any one of the processes of S511, if the second pending storage number notification waiting time is set in the process of step S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command Is stored at the head of the empty area in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B (step S512), and the process returns to step S501.

  When the first reserved memory number notification command is received together with the first variation start command, the reserved memory number notification command may not be stored in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the first start winning received command buffer 194A.

  Further, when the second reserved memory number notification command is received together with the second variation start command, the reserved memory number notification command may not be stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the second start winning received command buffer 194B.

  If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in step S510 (step S510; No), after making settings according to other received commands (step S513), the process returns to step S501. For example, when the received command is a gaming state designation command, the gaming state designation command is analyzed to identify the current gaming state. Also, for example, when the received command is a hit end designation command, the hit end designation command is analyzed to determine whether the time is short.

  Start opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variation category command, reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command, second reserved memory number) An effect control command received from the main board 11 when a start winning is generated as in the case of a notification command) is also referred to as a start winning command. The first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the first start opening prize designation command, and the second start opening prize designation command are also referred to as reserved storage information. The symbol designation command and the variation category command are also referred to as determination result information.

  When receiving commands are sequentially stored from the top of the empty area in the first start winning received command buffer 194A, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command, a variable category command, or a first reserved memory count notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, or may be stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area.

  In addition, when storing received commands sequentially from the beginning of the empty area in the second start winning received command buffer 194B, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command, a variable category command, or a second reserved memory count notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, or may be stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 25 as the effect control process.
In the effect control process shown in FIG. 27, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a winning effect determining process (step S150). In the winning effect determining process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the stored contents in the start winning reception command buffer (the first starting winning reception command buffer 194A or the second starting winning reception command buffer 194B). , A process for determining whether or not a start opening winning designation command is received as a received command, and a display mode (also referred to as a display mode at the time of addition) of a hold display when additionally displaying in the start winning memory display area 5H are determined. The process to perform is performed.

  After performing the winning effect determination process in step S150, for example, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like, one of the following processes in steps S170 to 177 is performed. Select and execute.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” which is an initial value. This variable display start waiting process is based on whether a first variation start command (or second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 are received. This includes processing for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the display device 5. When it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbols in the image display device 5 In order to perform the variable display and other various production operations, the process of determining the fixed decorative design according to the variation pattern of the special symbol and the type of the display result, or the first hold display or the second hold display is shifted and activated. A process of displaying a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display in the display area AHA, various effects and various effects effects (for example, active which is the main notice effect) A process for determining a display change effect, an effect mode of the active display change effect, an effect mode in a change informing the number of time reductions or the number of times of change A process of determining the current gaming state and counting the number of executions of a special figure game in which probability variation control is executed, counting the number of executions of a special figure game in which time reduction control is executed, It includes processing to set the game state. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the effect process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192, based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process. Various control data are read out, and various effect control (for example, decorative display variable display control during decorative display variable display) is performed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a video signal (effect image) to the image display device 5 based on the read control data and displays it on the screen, and outputs an effect sound signal to the audio control board 13. Then, various kinds of effect control such as control for outputting the effect sound from the speaker 8 and control for turning on / off / flashing the lamp 9 by outputting the illumination signal to the lamp control board 14 are executed.

  After performing such effect control, for example, it corresponds to the fact that the end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or that the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Then, the finalized decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed. If the final decorative design is displayed in a complete stop in response to the end code being read from the production control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. Even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the confirmed decorative pattern on the production control board 12 side. When the definitive decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. When the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is “6” corresponding to the big hit middle production process. Update to Further, when the production control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “lost”, and the value of the production process flag is the initial value. Update to “0”.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit gaming state, reads various control data based on the set content, and performs variable display in step S172. Similar to the medium effect process, various effect controls in the big hit gaming state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electric decoration signal, and the like. Further, in the big hit effect process, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “7” which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, etc., reads various control data based on the set contents, and is performing variable display in step S172. Similar to the effect processing, various effect controls at the end of the big hit gaming state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electric decoration signal, and the like. In addition, in this ending effect process, the game state before the big hit is determined, the process for setting the game state for executing the probability variation control and the time reduction control, and the number of executions of the special figure game in which the probability variation control is executed are set. Or setting the number of executions of a special figure game in which time-shortening control is executed, processing for clearing the value of the production number counter that counts the number of fluctuations in the production control board 12 and setting it to “0”, etc. include. After these ending effect processes, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S171 of FIG. 27 as the variable display start setting process.
In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 28, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and the special figure display result is “lost”. It is determined whether or not (step S522). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost” (step S522; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data in the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the designated fluctuation pattern is used. Is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach (loss)” (ie, “PA1-1”, “PA2-1”, “PA2-” in FIGS. 5A, 5B, and 5C). 2 "" PA2-3 ") or not (step S523).

  If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S523; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left determined symbol determination table, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols.

  Next, a predetermined right determined symbol determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random values for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. , Etc., the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. , Etc., the middle fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the fixed decorative symbols. In the process of step S524, a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination that becomes a predetermined chance symbol symbol may be determined in response to the case where the changing symbol notice is being executed.

  If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S523; No), a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S525). As an example, in the process of step S525, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left and right determined symbols updated by a random counter or the like provided in the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. In addition, by referring to a predetermined left / right determined symbol determination table or the like, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together. The decorative symbol with the same symbol number is determined. Further, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to this, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

  Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not a jackpot combination but a reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, a difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S522 that the special figure display result is not “losing” (step S522; No), the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R probability change (surprise)” or “2R probability change → It is determined whether it is “big hit” (for example, 16R probability variation) other than these, which is “16R probability variation (promotion)” (step S526). When it is determined that “2R probability change (surprise accuracy)” or “2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion)” (step S526; Yes), for example, “2R probability change” (also called “special appearance”), for example, (Combination accuracy) "or" 2R probability change-> 16R probability change (promotion) "corresponding to the final stop symbol combination is determined (step S527). In this case, a predetermined chance index determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random numbers for chance index determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. It is only necessary to determine a combination of fixed decorative symbols that constitute any of the opening chance eyes by referring to.

  When it is determined in step S526 that it is a “big hit” (for example, “16R positive change”) other than “2R accuracy change (probability)” or “2R accuracy change → 16R accuracy change (promotion)” (step S526; No), a big hit combination Is determined as a final decorative symbol combination that constitutes (step S528). As an example, in the process of step S528, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the jackpot fixed symbol updated by the random counter of the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined jackpot determined symbol determination table, etc., the display is stopped and aligned in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. A decorative design having the same design number is determined. At this time, a determination may be made that a different decorative symbol is a final decorative symbol depending on which type of jackpot is, for example, whether it is a 16R probability change or whether there is a promotion effect during the big hit.

  As a specific example, when the jackpot type is “16R probability variation”, any one of a plurality of types of normal symbols or probability variation symbols is selected, and a non-probability variation jackpot combination or 16R probability variation bonus combination is selected. What is necessary is just to determine to the definite design which comprises. At this time, when it is determined to be a definite decorative symbol of a non-probable variation big hit combination, the notification that it is controlled to the probable variation state is not performed in the re-drawing effect during variable display, and is executed corresponding to the big hit gaming state. What is necessary is just to alert | report that it is controlled to a probable change state by the promotion effect during a big hit. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a definite decorative combination of probability variation big hit combination, a notification that control is made to the probability variation state is performed in the re-lottery effect during variable display or without executing the re-lottery effect. When the big hit type is “non-probable change”, any one of the multiple types of normal symbols may be selected and determined as a definite decorative symbol constituting the non-probable big hit combination.

  After performing either the process of step S524 or the process of step S528, the pending digest process is performed (step S530). Specifically, an active display corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the change is displayed in the active display area AHA (in other words, a special image including the active display corresponding to the change is displayed). For example, when the change of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the first special symbol game (when the variable display of the decorative symbol is linked to the first special symbol game), the first start winning memory display area An active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of 5HL is displayed in the active display area AHA (a special image including an active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning storage display area 5HL Is displayed).

  More specifically, the production control CPU 120 moves the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning memory display area 5HL to the active display area AHA and displays the active display. Is set as a usage pattern, and the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set production control pattern is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. An active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the area 5HL is displayed in the active display area AHA. Note that the active display in the active display area AHA may be displayed in the same manner as the hold display, or may be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the hold display but different from the hold display. The same is true when the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game.

  Also, in the process of step S530, when there is a hold display in addition to the hold display (active display) to be digested in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the effect control CPU 120 displays the other hold display as the first. When there is a hold display in addition to the active display in the second start prize storage display area 5HR, the other hold display is shifted in the second start prize storage display area 5HR.

  After executing the process of step S530, the game state setting process at the time of variation is executed (step S531). In this variation gaming state setting process, when the gaming state is other than the low probability low base state (normal mode), that is, one or both of the probability variation state (high probability state) and the short time state (high base state). In the case, the processing of adding the counter value of the production number counter by the production control counter setting unit 193, the processing of resetting, the number of executions of the special-purpose game in the probability variation state (high accuracy state) and the short time state (high base state) The process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the special figure game has reached a predetermined number of times, the probability changing control for controlling to one or both of the probability changing state (high accuracy state) and the time shortening state (high base state) and the time reduction control are terminated. A process for setting one or both of the low probability state and the low base state is included. Details will be described later.

  After executing the variation gaming state setting process of step S531, according to the remaining number of advantageous states, a process for setting a notification effect pattern of a notification effect for notifying the jackpot type, for example, a variation transmitted from the main board 11 This includes processing for setting (or resetting) the production control pattern based on the specified variation pattern and the determination result thereof by reading the EXT data in the pattern designation command. Details will be described later.

  After executing the process of step S532, the execution execution setting during other variable display is performed (step S533). As an example, in the process of step S533, a process for determining whether to execute an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to the change, a process for determining the type of active display change effect at the time of execution, and a time for executing Processing to determine the display mode of the active display change effect, processing to determine the execution timing of the active display change effect at the time of execution, processing to set the change display effect of hold display and active display, jackpot notification sound and jackpot notification You may make it perform execution setting of the "one-shot notification production | presentation" which immediately notifies (definitely alert | reports) that the variable display result will be "big hit" by light emission. Examples of jackpot notification sounds are alarm sounds, chime sounds, siren sounds, and the like. An example of the big hit notification light emission is light emission of a flash lamp constituting the light emitting member 9CC. Further, in the process of step S533, it may be set so that a predetermined aspect of the effect is performed for liveliness, for example, regardless of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. For example, you may set so that the effect of the aspect which a predetermined lamp 9 (for example, light emission member 9SL, 9SR) light-emits is performed.

  After executing the processing of step S533, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command (step S534). . Subsequently, a change display start setting process for making a setting for starting the change of the decorative design or the like in the image display device 5 is executed (step S535). For example, an image display is performed by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern set as the use pattern in the effect execution setting process in step S532 to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The sound in the speaker 8 is transmitted by setting the setting for starting the variation of the decorative pattern on the screen of the device 5 or transmitting the effect sound signal specified by the sound control data included in the effect control pattern to the sound control board 13. Setting for starting output and setting for starting light emission in the lamp 9 by transmitting an illumination signal designated by lamp control data included in the effect control pattern to the lamp control board 14 are performed. .

  After executing the processing of step S535, the command stored in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A or the second starting winning prize reception command buffer 194B is digested (step S536). Specifically, when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the first special game, the effect control CPU 120 is the most of the commands associated with the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. The command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smaller buffer number is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (first start opening prize designation) The command associated with the command is shifted while maintaining the winning order, and when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, the command is stored in the second starting winning reception command buffer. Delete the command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands being The command stored in the area corresponding to the larger buffer number than the buffer number of the divided commands shifts while maintaining the winning order.

  Further, in the process of step S536, deletion or shift of information stored in the first prefetching advance notice buffer 194C or the second prefetching advance notice buffer 194D provided in the RAM 122 or the like is also performed in accordance with the deletion or shift of the command. . Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S537), and the variable display start setting process ends.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the gaming state setting process at the time of change executed in step S531 of FIG.
In FIG. 28, the effect control CPU 120 determines the state of one or both of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag, for example, by checking the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 and the like. Then, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a low probability and low base state (step S701). When both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are in the off state, that is, when the low probability low base state is present (step S701; YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends the variation gaming state setting process. On the other hand, when one or both of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are in the on state, that is, when the low accuracy high base state, the high accuracy high base state, and the high accuracy low base state (step S701; NO), The CPU 120 sets the value of the effect number counter for counting the number of executions of the special-purpose game (ST number, time reduction number) in one or both of the probability variation state and the time reduction state provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 to, for example, 1 It is updated by adding (step S702).

  Subsequent to the processing in step S702, the effect control CPU 120 executes the probability variation control set by the after-hit gaming state setting process in FIG. 31 executed as a part of the ending effect process in step S177 in FIG. The number of executions of the special figure game (also referred to as the ST number or the probability variation number) (for example, ST70 times) is read (step S703) and executed as a part of the ending effect process in step S177 of FIG. The number of executions of the special-purpose game (also referred to as the number of time reductions) (for example, the time reduction of 70 times) for executing the time reduction control set by the big hit game state setting process is read (step S704).

  Following the processing in step S704, the effect control CPU 120 determines the state of the probability change flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191, and determines whether or not the current game state is the probability change state (high probability state). That is, it is determined whether or not the state of the probability variation flag is on (step S705). When the current game state is a probability change state (high probability state) (step S705; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the special game that executes the probability change control in which the value of the effect number counter is read in step S703. It is determined whether or not the value is larger than the value indicating (step S706). When the value of the effect number counter is larger than the value indicating the number of executions of the special figure game that executes the probability variation control read in step S703 (step S706; YES), the effect control CPU 120 has the effect control flag setting unit 191. For example, the probability variation flag provided in is cleared and turned off to set the low probability state (step S707), and the probability variation control is terminated. Here, setting to the low-accuracy state changes the state recognized by the CPU 120 for effect control (information such as a probability change flag stored on the effect control board 12 side) and is recognized by the CPU 103. The state (information such as the probability variation flag stored on the main board 11 side) related to the determination of whether or not to make a big hit is not changed.

  After the processing of step S707, or when the current gaming state is not the probability variation state (high probability state), that is, when the probability variation flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is off (step S705; NO) ) Or when the value of the effect number counter is not greater than the value indicating the number of executions of the special game that executes the probability variation control read in step S703 (step S706; NO), after any processing, The CPU 120 determines the state of the short time flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191, and whether or not the current gaming state is the short time state (high base state), that is, whether the short time flag state is on. It is determined whether or not (step S708).

  When the current gaming state is the short time state (high base state) (step S708; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the special-purpose game that executes the short time control in which the value of the effect number counter is read in step S704. It is determined whether or not the value is larger than the value indicating (step S709). When the value of the effect counter is larger than the value indicating the number of executions of the special game that executes the time-shortening control read in step S704 (step S709; YES), the effect control CPU 120 provides the effect control flag setting unit 191. Is set to a low base state by, for example, clearing the time-shortening flag provided in (1) and turning it off (step S710), and the time-shortening control is terminated. Note that setting to the low base state here changes the state recognized by the CPU 120 for effect control (information such as the time flag stored on the effect control board 12 side) and is recognized by the CPU 103. In other words, the state related to the determination as to whether or not to make a big hit (information such as a time-short flag stored on the main board 11 side) is not changed.

  After the processing of step S710 or when the current gaming state is not the time-short state (high base state), that is, when the state of the time-short flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is OFF (step S708; NO) ), Or the value of the effect counter is not greater than the value indicating the number of executions of the special-purpose game that executes the time-shortening control read in step S704 (step S709; NO), after any processing, The CPU 120 determines the state of both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191, and whether or not the current game state is the normal state (low probability low base state), that is, the probability change. It is determined whether or not the flag state is off and the hourly flag state is off (step S711).

  When the current gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base state), that is, when the state of the probability change flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is off and the state of the time reduction flag is off (step S711; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the set value of the number of executions of the special figure game for executing the probability variation control to “0” (step S712), and sets the number of executions of the special figure game for executing the time reduction control. The value is cleared to “0” (step S713), and the value of the fluctuation number counter is cleared to “0” (step S714). After such processing is executed, the gaming state setting processing at the time of variation ends.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of time reductions and the number of STs (probability variation number) are the same number of times, for example, when both the number of time reductions and the number of STs are 70, the processes in step S708 and step S709 are performed. If the current gaming state is not the probability variation state (high probability state), that is, if the state of the probability variation flag is OFF (step S705; NO), the effect control CPU 120 is provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. The effect control CPU 120 clears the time-saving flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 after performing the process of setting the low probability state by clearing the probability change flag and turning it off (step S707). Then, a process of setting the low base state (step S710) may be performed by turning it off.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the post-hit gaming state setting process executed as part of the ending effect process in step S177 of FIG.
In the after-hit gaming state setting process shown in FIG. 30, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms the state of the time-short flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 so that the game state before the big hit is a time-short state (high Base state), that is, it is determined whether or not the state of the time reduction flag is on (step S901). When the game state before the big hit is not the time-short state (high base state), that is, when the state of the time-short flag is not on (step S901; NO), the effect control CPU 120 is the probability change provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. The flag state is turned on to set the high-accuracy state (probability change state), and the time-short flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is turned on to set the high base state (step S902). In other words, in the processing of step S902, when the big hit is made in the low base state, the effect gaming state for starting the probability variation control and the time reduction control corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state is set to the high probability high base state. It is a process to do.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S902, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the number of executions of the special figure game (probability change number (ST number)) for executing the probability change control to a predetermined number (for example, 70 times) (step S603). Further, following the process of step ST903, the effect control CPU 120 sets the number of executions (time reduction number) of the special figure game for executing the time reduction control to a predetermined number (for example, 70 times) (step S904).

  On the other hand, when the game state before the big hit is the time-short state (high base state), that is, when the state of the time-short flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S901; YES), The effect control CPU 120 turns on the state of the probability change flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 to set the state to the highly accurate state (probability change state), and sets the state of the time reduction flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. It is turned on and set to the high base state (step S906). In other words, the processing of step S906 is a big hit in the high base state, for example, a big hit (16R probability variation, 2R probability variation (surprise), 2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion)) during probability variation or short time. In addition, this is a process for setting the effect gaming state for starting the probability variation control and the time-shortening control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state to the high probability high base state.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S906, the effect control CPU 120 sets the number of executions of the special figure game (probability change number (ST number)) for executing the probability change control to a predetermined number (for example, 70 times) (step S907). Further, following the process of step ST907, the effect control CPU 120 sets the number of executions (time reduction number) of the special figure game for executing the time reduction control to a predetermined number (for example, 70 times) (step S908).

  After executing the processing for setting the number of time reductions to a predetermined number in steps S904 and S908, the value of the effect number counter is set to “0” and cleared. After such a process is executed, the post-hit gaming state setting process ends.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of time reductions and the number of STs (probability variation number) are the same, for example, when the number of time reductions and the number of STs are both 70, the effect control CPU 120 is in the gaming state before the big hit. Is a time-short state (high base state), that is, a process for determining whether or not the time-short flag state is on (step S901). The process of setting the certain state (probability variation state), turning on the state of the time flag and setting the high base state (step S906), the number of executions of the special game (probability variation number ( (ST number)) is set to a predetermined number (for example, 70 times) (step S907), and the number of executions (time) Count) a predetermined number of times (e.g., may be omitted process of setting the 70 times) (step S908).

  In addition, it may be possible to set the number of hourly times different depending on the state of the hourly flag before the big hit, the big hit type at the time of the big hit gaming state, Depending on the type of jackpot when entering the big hit game state, the number of STs (number of chances of change) may be set differently.

  Next, a specific example of control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  On the main board 11 side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the first start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 updates the first reserved memory number, and when the second start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 determines the second reserved memory number. Is updated (step S215). The CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category (step S217). The CPU 103 determines the special figure display result using the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the like (step S403). The CPU 103 determines the variation category based on the special figure display result that is the determination result, the number of reserved memories updated in step S215, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category extracted in step S217 (step S412). . The CPU 103 that has determined the variation category sets transmission of a variation category command that specifies the variation category that is the determination result (step S413), and executes command control processing (step S17). As a result, a variation category command for designating the variation category determined in step S412 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  On the main board 11 side, when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 first determines the variation category extracted in step S217 in the variation pattern setting process (step S111). Without using the random value MR3, the random value MR3 for determining the variation category is extracted again, and the numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is extracted. Subsequently, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern based on numerical data indicating the newly extracted random value MR3 for determining the variation category and numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern. The CPU 103 that has determined the variation pattern sets transmission of a variation pattern designation command that designates the variation pattern that is the determination result, and executes command control processing (step S17). Thereby, a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern determined in step S111 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  On the side of the production control board 12, when the first start condition is satisfied, the production control CPU 120 refers to the first prefetch notice buffer 194C or the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, and in the variable display, An effect control pattern is set based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the board 11.

  Next, a display operation example in the image display device 5 will be described.

FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (h) of FIG. 31 are obtained by arranging scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. In FIG. 31, an arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing.
The CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category (step S217), and for determining the special figure display result. It is assumed that the special figure display result is determined using the random value MR1 or the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S403), for example, “2R probability change (surprise)” is determined as the special figure display result.

  In the scene of FIG. 31A, the effect control CPU 120 determines the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, “PC2-2 (non-reach (2R probability variation (surprise))”. This is the state when the decorative design starts to change.

  In the scene of FIG. 31 (b) after the scene of FIG. 31 (a), a decorative symbol indicating “1” is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5L on the image display device 5, and the decorative symbol display areas 5C and 5R are displayed. The decorative design is changing. In the scene of FIG. 31 (c) after the scene of FIG. 31 (b), the decorative symbol indicating “1” displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5L in the scene of FIG. 31 (b) is in a reach state. As can be seen, if a decorative symbol indicating “1” is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5R, a slip appears, and the decorative symbol indicating “1” is not displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5R. In the scene d), a decorative symbol indicating “2” is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5R.

  The scene shown in FIG. 31 (e) after the scene shown in FIG. 31 (d) performs an effect of encouraging reaching the reach state in the scene shown in FIG. 31 (c). In the scene shown in FIG. After entering the non-reach state without entering the reach state, either the decorative pattern corresponding to 2R probability change (surprising accuracy) or a combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative patterns predetermined as an opening chance is temporarily stopped Is displayed. For example, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, decorative symbols corresponding to 2R probability change (probability) such as “1”, “accuracy”, and “2” are temporarily stopped and displayed. State.

  That is, in the display operation example in the image display device 5 in FIG. 31, the variation pattern selected by the effect control CPU 120 is a non-reach variation pattern with a slip effect that insists that the reach mode is reached, for example, non-reach (2R randomness). ) Is a variation pattern PC2-2 belonging to the variation category PC2.

  That is, the effect control CPU 120 is a variation pattern in which the variation pattern of the variation is “big hit”, and is a non-reach (2R probability variation (surprise)) variation pattern with a slip that represents a reach production effect, such as “PC2”. -2 (non-reach (2R probability change (surprise)), the current gaming state is a low probability low base state or the current gaming state is a high probability high base state, and the remaining number of advantageous states is less than a specific number When the big hit type is 2R probability variation (surprise accuracy), it is informed that it will not reach reach after performing the effect of encouraging reaching reach, and then it will be informed that it will become 2R probability variation (accuracy). Control is performed to select a variation pattern for executing the notification effect.

FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, FIGS. 32A to 32E show scenes in the image display device 5 arranged in time series. In FIG. 32, an arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing.
The CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category (step S217), and for determining the special figure display result. It is assumed that the special figure display result is determined using the random value MR1 or the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S403), for example, “2R probability change (surprise)” is determined as the special figure display result.

  In the scene of FIG. 32A, the effect control CPU 120 determines the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, “PC5-1 (super reach β (2R probability variation (surprise))”. Is a state when the change of the decorative design is started.

  32 (b) after the scene of FIG. 32 (a) is displayed on the image display device 5 in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and a decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed. The decorative design of is changing. The scene of FIG. 32 (c) after the scene of FIG. 32 (b) is displayed in a reach state with the decorative pattern indicating “5” displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the scene of FIG. 32 (b). Then, the decorative symbol indicating “6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5R. In the scene of FIG. 31 (d) after the scene of FIG. 32 (c), the variation of the decorative symbol indicating “6” temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5c is started again.

  The scene of FIG. 32 (e) after the scene of FIG. 32 (d) is a decorative pattern indicating “5” displayed in the reach state in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the scene of FIG. 32 (b). In the scene of FIG. 32 (c), it seems that it has become a reach lose, and in the scene of FIG. This is an example in which any one of the decorative symbols to be displayed or a combination of a plurality of types of determined decorative symbols predetermined as an opening chance is displayed temporarily. For example, the scene shown in FIG. 32 (e) corresponds to 2R probability variation (probability) such as “5”, “accuracy”, and “5” in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The decoration pattern to be displayed is temporarily stopped and displayed.

  In other words, in the display operation example in the image display device 5 of FIG. 32, the variation category PC3 of the reach variation pattern in which the variation pattern selected by the effect control CPU 120 becomes the reach mode (normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, etc.). , PC4, PC5, a variation pattern belonging to PC5, for example, a variation pattern PC5-1.

  In other words, the CPU 120 for effect control is a change pattern in which the change pattern of the change is “big hit”, and the change pattern with the reach effect is, for example, “PC5-1 ( Super reach β (2R probability change (surprise)), the current gaming state is a low probability low base state or the current gaming state is a high probability high base state, and the remaining number of advantageous states is less than a specific number Sometimes, when the big hit type is 2R probability change (surprise accuracy), it is notified that the reach will be lost after executing the effect that becomes the reach mode, and then the notification effect that notifies that it becomes 2R probability change (accuracy) is executed. Control to select a variation pattern.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the above embodiment is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like), and the conditions (for example, winning of 16R probability variation, winning of 2R probability variation (surprise), etc.) are established. Based on the above, the advantageous state control means for controlling the advantageous state (for example, the probability variation state, the short time state, etc.) a predetermined number of times and the advantageous state (for example, the reach state, the big hit gaming state, the probability variation state, the short time state, etc.) Execute any one of a plurality of notification effects that notify whether or not they are controlled (for example, non-reach losing effects including reach (tempered) groining effects, reach-losing effects, non-reach effects, effects per reach, etc.) A notification effect executing means, and the notification effect executing means at least wins a specific condition (for example, 2R probability change (surprise)) when controlled to an advantageous state, etc. Is established, the first notification effect (for example, reach (tempe) squeak effect, reach loss effect, etc.) for notifying that it is not controlled to the advantageous state is executed, and then the fact that it is controlled to the advantageous state is notified. 2 A notification effect (for example, a notification effect for notifying that the 2R probability change (probability) has been established) is executed, and the ratio of which first notification effect is executed before the second notification effect is executed. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it varies depending on the remaining number of advantageous states.

  Here, as described above, the first notification effect includes, for example, a reach (tempe pie) scooping effect, a reach lose effect, and the like. The second notification effect includes, for example, a notification effect for notifying that the 2R probability change (probability) has been established. That is, the first notification effect and the second notification effect do not need to directly notify whether or not the advantageous state is achieved, but indirectly notify whether or not the advantageous state is achieved. May be.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can execute a notification effect for notifying establishment of a condition for achieving an advantageous state in accordance with the remaining number of advantageous states, so that it is possible to improve interest. In addition, the second notification timing, for example, the timing after executing the failure production such as the case where the reach production effect is not executed and the reach is not achieved, or the case where the reach production is executed and the big hit is not achieved is second. Since the notification effect, for example, the notification of a big hit, can be executed, the player's interest can be improved.

  Further, in the above gaming machine, the condition includes a plurality of types (for example, winning of 16R probability variation, winning of 2R probability (surprise), 2R probability variation → 16R, which are different from each other in a given value (for example, appearance ball) obtained after establishment. (E.g., elective change (promotion), etc.) and controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., probable change state, short-running state, etc.), and a condition with a small value added after establishment (e.g. 2R probability change (surprise)) When the winning etc.) is established, the remaining number of advantageous states may be reset.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can improve the interest of the player even when a condition with small added value (out of play) is satisfied.

  Further, in any one of the above gaming machines, the notification effect executing means is more advantageous when the number of remaining advantageous states is less than when the remaining number of advantageous states is large (for example, more advantageous than when the remaining number of advantageous states is a specific number or more). When the remaining number of times of the state is less than a specific number of times, the notification effect (for example, the first notification effect such as the reach (tempe pie) scooping effect, the reach loss effect, etc.) or the 2R probability change (surprise) is established. The second notification effect such as the notification effect to be performed) may be executed at a later timing during variable display of the identification information.

  For example, when the remaining number of advantageous states is large (when the remaining number of advantageous states is greater than or equal to a specific number), for example, the remaining number of advantageous states is greater than or equal to a specific number, In the setting in the case of 2, 3 (setting by C-TBL2B shown in FIG. 17B (B)), the non-reach fluctuation categories “PA1” and “PA2” are selected, but the remaining number of advantageous states is small. (When the remaining number of advantageous states is less than a specific number), for example, the setting when the remaining number of advantageous states is greater than or equal to the specific number, the special figure display result is lost, and the number of reserved memories is two or three ( In the setting by C-TBL2C shown in FIG. 17C (B), the notification effect is generated at a later timing during the variable display of the identification information because the variation time is longer than the non-reach variation categories “PA1” and “PA2”. Reach varying categories to perform "PA3", "PA4", the percentage of "PA5" is selected is high (FIG. 16, FIG. 17B (B), FIG. 17C (B), FIG. 5A).

  Also, for example, when the remaining number of advantageous states is large (when the remaining number of advantageous states is greater than or equal to a specific number), for example, the remaining number of advantageous states is greater than or equal to a specific number and ) And when the number of reserved memories is 2, 3 (setting by C-TBL 5B shown in FIG. 17B (E)), the non-reach fluctuation category “PC2” is selected, while the remaining number of advantageous states Is small (when the remaining number of advantageous states is less than the specific number), for example, the remaining number of advantageous states is equal to or greater than the specific number, the special figure display result is 2R probability change (surprising accuracy), and the number of stored memories is 2, 3 In the case of the setting (setting by C-TBL 25C shown in FIG. 17C (E)), the variation time is longer than that of the non-reach variation category “PC2,” and the notification is made at a later timing during the variable display of the identification information. The percentage of selection of the reach variation categories “PC3”, “PC4”, and “PC5” for executing the output is high (FIG. 16, FIG. 17B (E), FIG. 17C (E), FIG. 5A, FIG. 5C). .

  Also, for example, when the remaining number of advantageous states is large (when the remaining number of advantageous states is greater than or equal to a specific number), for example, the remaining number of advantageous states is greater than or equal to a specific number and ) And the setting when the number of reserved memories is 2 or 3 (the setting of the variation pattern when the variation category “PC2” is selected in the setting by the C-TBL 5B shown in FIG. 17B (E)) (in FIG. 20B (I)) In the setting of the fluctuation pattern determination table shown))), the ratio of the non-reach fluctuation pattern “PC2-1” being selected is 30%, and the non-reach fluctuation patterns “PC2-2” and “PC2” having a longer fluctuation time than that. -3 ”is selected at 70% (“ PC2-2 ”40%,“ PC2-3 ”30%), while the remaining number of advantageous states is small (the remaining number of advantageous states is special When the remaining number of advantageous states is equal to or greater than a specific number, the special figure display result is 2R probability change (surprise), and the number of reserved memories is 2, 3 as an example (FIG. 17C (E) When the variation category “PC2” is selected in the setting by the C-TBL 5C shown in FIG. 5B (the setting by the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20C (I)), the non-reach variation pattern “PC2-1”. Is 20%, and the non-reach variation pattern “PC2-2” or “PC2-3” having a longer variation time is 80% (“PC2-2” 60%, “PC2-3” 20%), the rate of selection of the variation pattern for executing the notification effect at a late timing during the variable display of the identification information is high. In other words, it is set so that the notification effect is executed at a later timing when the remaining number of advantageous states is large (for example, when it is equal to or greater than the specific number) (for example, when it is less than the specific number). May be.

  That is, in each variation pattern, the notification effect is executed toward the end of the special figure variation time (the final stage). Therefore, when the remaining number of advantageous states is small, it is more than when the remaining number of advantageous states is large. However, the notification effect is executed at a late timing.

  Also, when the special figure fluctuation time is the same, but the execution timing of the notification effect is different, prepare a different one, and when the remaining number of advantageous states is large (for example, when it is more than a specific number of times) (for example, It may be set so that the variation pattern in which the notification effect is executed at a later timing is selected. For example, in the variation pattern “PC5-4” belonging to the variation category “PC5” shown in FIG. 5C, the notification effect is executed when the variation pattern “PC5-4-1” is 50000 ms, and the variation pattern “PC5-4-2” is displayed. ”Prepares fluctuation patterns“ PC5-4-1 ”and“ PC5-4-2 ”, both of which the special figure fluctuation time for executing the notification effect at 72000 ms is 76000 ms, and the remaining number of advantageous states Accordingly, the rate at which the variation pattern “PC5-4-2” is selected may be set to be higher when the number of remaining advantageous states is larger than when the remaining number of advantageous states is large.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can focus attention on the variable display until the late (second half) timing of the variable display when the remaining number of advantageous states is small, and can improve the interest.

  In any one of the above gaming machines, the notification effect executing means may provide the condition (for example, a value to be obtained that is obtained after establishment when the remaining number of advantageous states is equal to or greater than a specific number (for example, the remaining 50) (for example, , 16R probability change, etc. (for example, when the initial number of remaining advantageous states is 70 and the remaining number of advantageous states is 55), the first notification effect (for example, reach) (Tempe) The second notification effect (for example, the notification effect for notifying that the 2R probability change (surprise) has been established) is executed without executing the scooping gaze effect, reach lose effect, etc., and the remaining number of advantageous states is Obtained after establishment when the number of times is less than a specific number (for example, 50 remaining) (for example, when the remaining number of advantageous states initially set is 70 and the remaining number of advantageous states is 36). Small said condition of grant value (e.g., a winning 2R probability variation (突確)) when is satisfied, may perform the second notification effect after performing the first notification effect.

  For example, when the remaining number of advantageous states is equal to or greater than a specific number of times, for example, when a condition such as 16R probability change is satisfied, the remaining number of advantageous states is equal to or greater than a specific number, Is set to 2 or 3 (setting of variation pattern when any of variation categories “PB3”, “PB4”, “PB5” is selected in the setting by C-TBL4B shown in FIG. 17B (D)) 20B (F) to FIG. 20B (H) are set according to the variation pattern determination table), the variation pattern per non-reach does not exist, and as in the setting examples of FIG. 20B (F) to FIG. 20B (H). A variation pattern is selected from any one of a plurality of reach variation patterns, that is, when a 16R probability variation is established, a reach (tempe) squeezing performance is performed. , Without performing such Richihazure effect, after performing the reach demonstration, 16R probability variation is variation pattern for notifying that it has established is selected.

  On the other hand, when the remaining number of advantageous states is less than the specific number, for example, the remaining number of advantageous states is equal to or greater than the specific number, the special figure display result is 2R probability change (surprise), and the number of reserved memories is 2, 3 (The change pattern setting when the change category “PC2” is selected in the setting by C-TBL 5C shown in FIG. 17C (E) (by the change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20C (I) and FIG. 20C (M)). Setting)) is a non-reach variation pattern such as non-reach variation patterns “PC2-1” to “PC2-3” or “PD2-1” to “PD2-3”, and the reach (tempe) biting gas After performing the production and reach loss production, it is notified that 2R probability variation (surprising accuracy) or 2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (promotion), which is smaller than the added value obtained by 16R probability variation, has been established. Fluctuation pattern is adapted to be selected that.

  That is, when the condition with a large added value is satisfied when the remaining number of advantageous states is equal to or greater than the specific number, the second notification effect is executed without executing the first notification effect, and the remaining number of advantageous states is When the condition of low value added is satisfied when the number of times is less than the specific number of times, the second notification effect may be executed after the first notification effect is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can play the game without disappointing the player even when the notification effect that notifies that the remaining number of advantageous states is less than the specific number of times and does not enter the advantageous state is executed. Can maintain the expectation of the elderly.

  In any of the above gaming machines, at least a first value (for example, a ball) is given after the above conditions (for example, winning for 16R probability variation, winning for 2R probability variation (surprise), etc.) are established. (For example, when a game is given by a round game with 2R probability change (surprise)) and a second value (for example, a game) that is more advantageous to the player than the first value is given. If it is played (for example, when a game is given by a round game with 16R probability change), and if the first value is given (for example, a round game with 2R probability change (surprise)), it will appear to the player When a third value (for example, a ball) that is more advantageous than the first value is given (for example, when a ball is given by a round game of 2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion)). And there is at least The ratio to which the first value is given and the ratio to which the third value is given are the second notification effect (for example, a notification effect for notifying that the 2R probability change (probability) has been established). May be different depending on which of the first notification effects (for example, reach (tempered) punching effect, reach loss effect, etc.) is executed.

  For example, when 2R probability change (probability) is established, as shown in the setting examples of FIG. 20B (I) and FIG. The variation pattern “PC2-2”, which is a non-reach variation pattern accompanied with “”, is selected more than the other variation patterns “PC2-1” and “PC2-3” belonging to the same variation category “PC2”. When 2R probability variation → 16R probability variation (elevation) is established, as shown in FIG. 20B (M) and FIG. 20C (M), among the variation patterns per non-reach, the non-reach variation pattern with pseudo continuous variation The variation pattern “PC2-3” is higher than the other variation patterns “PC2-1” and “PC2-2” belonging to the same variation category “PC2”. That is, depending on which first notification effect is executed, the ratio of the first value and the ratio of the third value, that is, the ratio of 2R probability variation and 2R probability variation → 16R probability variation. The rate at which (promotion) is established may be different.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can make the player pay more attention to which first notification effect is executed.

  In the above description, as shown in FIG. 20A, FIG. 20B, and FIG. 20C, a setting example of the variation pattern determination ratio is set for each gaming state, for example, a low probability low base state (normal state) or an advantageous state (high probability high The base state), the remaining number of advantageous states is more than a specific number, or the remaining number of advantageous states is less than a specific number, etc. May be.

  In the above description, before executing the second notification effect (for example, the notification effect for notifying that the 2R probability change (probability) has been established), any first notification effect (for example, reach (tempered)) is used. As an example of changing the ratio of whether to execute a gaze effect, a reach loss effect, etc.) according to the remaining number of advantageous states, the configuration example of the variation category determination table shown in FIGS. 17A to 17C and the variation shown in FIGS. 20A to 20C We explained the case where the variable category decision ratio and the variation pattern decision ratio differ depending on the remaining number of advantageous states for each of the pattern decision ratio setting examples. However, the configuration example of the fluctuation category decision table or the fluctuation pattern decision ratio Only one of the setting examples may be varied according to the remaining number of advantageous states.

  In the above description, before executing the second notification effect (for example, the notification effect for notifying that the 2R probability change (probability) has been established), any first notification effect (for example, reach (tempered)) is used. As an example of changing the ratio of whether to execute a gaze effect, a reach loss effect, etc.) according to the remaining number of advantageous states, the configuration example of the variation category determination table shown in FIGS. 17A to 17C and the variation shown in FIGS. 20A to 20C The case where the variable category determination ratio and the variation pattern determination ratio differ according to the remaining number of advantageous states has been described for each of the pattern determination ratio setting examples. One or both of the setting examples of the pattern determination ratio are made different according to the remaining number of advantageous states, and the production control board 12 In this regard, for example, with respect to the variation pattern selected on the main board 11, the selection ratio of the effect control pattern set according to the remaining number of advantageous states may be different. The execution ratio of the effects may be varied with respect to the variation pattern selected on the main board 11.

  In the above description, in the configuration example of the big hit type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. 7, the big hit type of 2R probability variation (surprising accuracy) is both in the case of the first special figure and the second special figure. Although an example of assignment is shown, for example, a jackpot type of 2R probability variation (surprise accuracy) may be assigned to only one of the first special figure and the second special figure.

  In the above description, in the configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. 7, both the case of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure are changed from 2R probability change to 16R probability change (promotion). Although an example in which the jackpot type is assigned has been shown, for example, the jackpot type of 2R probability change → 16R probability change (promotion) may be assigned to only one of the first special figure and the second special figure.

  In the above description, when the high base state or the big hit gaming state is controlled, it is not necessary to perform the prefetch for the first special figure. Thereby, a stock-like production can be prevented.

  In the above description, an example having a variation pattern corresponding to 2R accuracy variation (surprise accuracy) or 2R accuracy variation → 16R accuracy variation (promotion) has been described. However, 2R accuracy variation (stability accuracy) and 2R accuracy variation → 16R accuracy variation (promotion). It is not necessary to provide a variation pattern corresponding to one or both. In this case, for example, instead of a variation pattern for each jackpot type, a variation pattern such as a variation pattern for a big hit and a variation pattern for a loss may be provided.

  In the above description, when the hold data is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B, the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B has priority. The example of digesting is explained above, but the reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A and the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is digested from the one with the highest winning order. Alternatively, a distribution device may be provided so that the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening are alternately awarded to digest the pending data in the order of winning.

In the above description, examples of setting the variation pattern determination ratio by the variation pattern determination table as shown in FIGS. 20A, 20B, and 20C are the normal state (for example, the low-accuracy low-base state) and the low-accuracy base. An example of setting a variation pattern determination ratio based on a variation pattern determination table that varies depending on the state and the high-accuracy base state or the high-accuracy low-base state may be used.
In the above description, the setting example of the variation pattern determination ratio by the variation pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 20A, FIG. 20B, and FIG. 20C differs depending on the remaining number of game states and advantageous states and the number of times specified in multiple stages. An example of setting the variation pattern determination ratio using the variation pattern determination table may be used.
5A, FIG. 5B, and FIG. 5C are provided with a variation pattern of a super shortened variation having a variation time shorter than that of the shortened variation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. An example of setting may be provided.

In the above description, the configuration examples of the determination ratios of the variation category determination table as illustrated in FIGS. 17A, 17B, and 17C are the normal state (for example, the low accuracy low base state) and the low accuracy high base state. A configuration example of a determination ratio based on a variation category determination table that differs depending on the high-accuracy high-base state or the high-accuracy low-base state may be used.
In the above description, the configuration example of the determination ratio by the variable category determination table as shown in FIG. 17A, FIG. 17B, and FIG. 17C is the variable category determination that differs depending on the remaining number of game states and advantageous states and the specific number of stages. A configuration example of the determination ratio by table may be used.

  In the above description, the process of clearing the set value of the number of executions of the special figure game for executing the probability change control in step S462 of FIG. 22 to “0” is executed in the process of setting the low probability state in step S457. Alternatively, it may be executed at other timing such as a big hit gaming state. In addition, the process of clearing the set value of the number of executions of the special figure game for executing the time-shortening control in step S463 of FIG. 22 to “0” may be executed in the process of setting the low base state in step S460. However, it may be executed at other timing such as a big hit gaming state. Further, the process of clearing the value of the variation counter in step S464 of FIG. 21 to “0” may be executed at other timing such as a big hit gaming state.

  In the above description, the process of clearing the set value of the number of executions of the special figure game for executing the probability change control in step S712 of FIG. 29 to “0” is executed in the process of setting the low probability state in step S707. Alternatively, it may be executed at other timing such as a big hit gaming state. In addition, the process of clearing the set value of the number of executions of the special figure game for executing the time-shortening control in step S713 of FIG. 29 to “0” may be executed in the process of setting the low base state in step S710. However, it may be executed at other timing such as a big hit gaming state. Further, the process of clearing the value of the effect number counter in step S714 of FIG. 29 to “0” may be executed at other timing such as a big hit gaming state.

  In the above description, the game state setting process at the time of variation as shown in FIG. 28 may be performed as a process at the time of variable display stop, for example, as with the main board 11.

  In the above description, the number of executions of the special figure game controlled to the probability change state and the number of executions of the special figure game controlled to the short-time state are, for example, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 after the big hit ends. It may be specified by a command, or may be specified by a command specifying a jackpot type. Also, when the probability changing state is ended or when the time reduction state is ended, the main board 11 may notify the effect control board 12 by a command, for example.

  In the above description, the value of the variation counter that counts the number of executions of the special figure game controlled to the probability variation state is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example, every time the variation starts. You may make it notify by.

  In the above description, the condition may be a condition other than the big hit. For example, after the special symbol indicating the number “2” that is the small hit symbol is derived as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, A small winning game state as a special gaming state, for example, a variable winning operation is performed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to change to an open state advantageous to the player, for example, a special variable state. This may be established when controlling the winning ball apparatus 7 to be repeatedly executed in the first state (open state) over the second period, or when the loss variation reaches a predetermined number of times. It may be established by executing a specific variation such as a variation. In addition, the condition is satisfied, for example, when a variation pattern of a super shortened variation having a variation time shorter than the shortened variation is provided and this super shortened variation pattern is selected or when the super shortened variation pattern is selected a predetermined number of times. You may do it.

  In the above description, the number of round games in the jackpot game state may be provided with a plurality of types of round games such as 2 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 15 rounds, and the like. Moreover, the number of time reductions may be provided in a plurality of types such as 70 times and 100 times, for example. In addition, a plurality of types of probability variation may be provided, for example, ST50 times and ST70 times.

  Further, in the above description, after notifying that an advantageous state such as a reach hit effect (sliding → non-reach) or reach (losing) is not achieved, the case where the advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state is notified is described. However, when a notice effect such as a success effect or a failure effect is executed along with the operation of the stick controller 31A, it may be notified that an advantageous state such as a big hit is obtained after the failure effect is executed.

  In the above description, after performing notification that an advantageous state such as a reach hit effect (sliding → non-reach) or reach (losing) is not achieved, an execution ratio of the effect that informs that an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state is obtained. However, it is reported that it will be in an advantageous state depending on, for example, whether it has been lost in the Super Reach α production or after being informed of the Loss in the Super Reach β production. You may make it the execution ratio of the production to perform differ.

  Further, in the above description, in order to notify the CPU 120 for effect control of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc., one change pattern command is given when the change is started. Although the example of transmitting is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control CPU 120 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notification by two commands, the CPU 103 determines whether the first command has reached a reach such as the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream or the presence of a slip effect (if not reaching, before the so-called second stop. ) Command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode, and the second command has reached reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery (if it does not reach, after the so-called second stop) It is also possible to send a command indicating the fluctuation time or fluctuation mode. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 may perform the effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. The CPU 103 may notify the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control CPU 120 may select a specific change mode to be executed at each timing. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. By notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands in this way, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In the above description, the “ratio” is not limited to A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%, but A: B = 100%. : Those having a relationship such as 0%, that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation are also included in the “ratio”.

  In the above description, the first notification effect (notification effect for notifying that it is not in an advantageous state) has been described with respect to an example of reach (tempe) scooping gaze effect (sliding effect), reach loss effect, etc. It may be a loss effect that does not cause even a reach effect, or any notification effect as long as it notifies that it is not in an advantageous state. Also in this case, it is possible to execute the second notification effect that notifies that the advantageous state is obtained after the first notification effect that notifies that the advantageous state is not achieved.

  Note that the advantageous state is a state that can be controlled for a predetermined number of times and may be any state that is more advantageous to the player than other states, for example, the normal state.

  In addition, when not controlled to the advantageous state, a second notification effect for notifying that the advantageous state is obtained after executing the first notification effect for notifying that the advantageous state is not achieved when a specific condition is satisfied is provided. It is not necessary to execute (the first notification effect may be performed without performing the first notification effect, and the second notification effect may be performed to notify that the advantageous state is controlled), or the first notification that the advantageous state is not achieved. You may perform the 2nd alerting | reporting effect which alert | reports that it will be in an advantageous state after performing a notification effect.

  In addition, there is a notification effect that directly notifies that it is controlled to the advantageous state without performing the first notification effect even when the specific condition is satisfied even when the advantageous state is not controlled. Also good.

  As described above, the embodiment of the present invention has been described, but the device configuration, data configuration, processing shown in the flowchart of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various rendering operations including the rendering operation of the rendering image in the display area of the image display device 5, and the like. Can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  For example, in the probability change control, a gaming machine that provides a specific area in the special winning opening in advance and controls the game to a certain probability state based on the passing of the game ball through the specific area. For example, based on the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type, a game ball enters a specific area within the big winning opening by being assigned to multiple types of big hit types such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. It may be a gaming machine that controls to an easy gaming state and controls to a certain change state based on the passing of the game ball through this specific area.

  For example, based on the fact that there are probable big hits and normal big hits as jackpot types, and that the jackpot type was determined to be probable big hits, a gaming machine that is controlled to the probable state after the big hit game is shown. It is not limited. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus in which a predetermined probability changing area is provided (a certain variable winning ball apparatus may be provided in a single special variable winning ball apparatus, or a plurality of special variable winning balls may be provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a probable state after completion.

  Further, for example, a game machine that uses game media is taken as an example, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes, and game media such as game balls can be used. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives a score when the conditions for giving the prize are satisfied.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. However, according to the present invention, medals are inserted and a predetermined bet number is set, and the operation lever is operated by the player. A slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when a combination of stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when multiple types of symbols are rotated and the symbols are stopped according to the stop button operation by the player The present invention can also be applied to (hereinafter referred to as slot machine 1000). The slot machine 1000 has, for example, at least one of a big bonus, a regular bonus, a single bonus (hereinafter collectively referred to as a bonus), RT (Replay Time), AT (Assist Time), and ART (Assist Replay Time). It only has to be provided.

  The slot machine 1000 is configured so that, for example, a cylindrical left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel can be seen through a see-through window provided on the front door. A MAXBET switch for setting a number, a start switch for starting a game, a left stop switch for stopping each reel, a middle stop switch, a right stop switch, and a game display unit for displaying information related to the game . For example, when the player inserts a predetermined number (for example, 1 to 3) into the medal insertion part (or operates the MAXBET switch) and then operates the start switch, the game of the slot machine 1000 starts (for each reel). Rotation starts). After the game starts, if the player operates each stop switch in turn and operates the third stop switch, the game ends (the rotation of all the reels stops), and a pattern corresponding to a predetermined role When a combination of (designs arranged (printed or the like) on the surface of each reel) is derived (aligned) as a display result, a winning corresponding to the combination is generated. Note that the player can check the display result through the fluoroscopic window.

  The RAM of the slot machine 1000 stores a game state flag indicating a current game state among a plurality of types of game states, a winning flag indicating a winning combination, and the like. The winning combination lottery is performed based on the gaming state indicated by the gaming state flag (the winning probability varies depending on the gaming state). Also, the game state transitions according to various winnings, winnings, number of digested games, and the like.

  The normal gaming state is a normal gaming state and a gaming state with a low medal payout rate. The internal state is a gaming state in the game from when the special combination is won until the special combination wins. The bonus state is a gaming state that is shifted by the occurrence of a special role winning, and the winning probability of a small role (for example, bell) is significantly higher than the normal gaming state, and the medal payout rate is much higher than the normal gaming state This is a gaming state that becomes higher, and is a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. The RT state is, for example, a gaming state that transitions after winning the RT lottery (or after digesting a predetermined number of games (for example, the number of ceiling games)), and is a replay (re-game player) winning compared to the normal gaming state. This is a gaming state with a high probability, and is a second advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. The AT state is, for example, a so-called push state in which an AT lottery is won (or after a predetermined number of games (for example, the number of ceiling games) is consumed) and a transition is made according to a predetermined condition (for example, a rush replay winning). When a navigation switch is displayed and a stop switch is operated in accordance with the push navigation, a winning combination (for example, a bell or the like) wins, which is a gaming state in which the medal payout rate is higher than the normal gaming state, which is advantageous for the player. The third advantageous state. The ART state is, for example, a gaming state that transitions according to a predetermined condition (for example, a prize for a rush replay) after winning an ART lottery (or after digesting a predetermined number of games (for example, the number of ceiling games)). When the navigation is displayed and the stop switch is operated in accordance with the push order navigation, the winning combination (for example, replay, bell, etc.) wins, so that the gaming state is higher in medal payout rate than the normal gaming state. The high probability gaming state is a gaming state that transitions after winning a special role (or after digesting a predetermined number of games (for example, the number of ceiling games)), and is a special role (or RT lottery, Alternatively, the game state has a high winning probability of AT lottery or ART lottery, and is a fourth advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

  The bonus state, the RT state, the AT state, the ART state, and the high-probability gaming state are specific gaming states because they are advantageous to the player as compared to the normal gaming state.

  The role lottery, RT lottery, AT lottery, and ART lottery are performed based on the gaming state indicated by the current gaming state flag stored in the RAM at the start of the game (immediately after the start switch is operated), for example. The winning flag of the winning combination is stored. The winning is determined by, for example, a winning flag stored in the RAM, an operation timing of a stop switch, or the like. The predetermined number of games (for example, the number of ceiling games) may be determined by lottery from a plurality of types of games at the time of transition from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state (for example, When the ceiling game count value is cleared, the next ceiling game number may be drawn by lottery), or when the transition from the specific game state to the normal game state, it is determined by lottery from a plurality of types of games. (The number of ceiling games of this time may be drawn by lottery just before starting to count the ceiling games). In addition to or instead of the above, the predetermined number of games (for example, the number of ceiling games) is determined, for example, depending on what the specific game state immediately before the transition to the normal game state is. Also good. For example, 1000 games after the big bonus, 800 games after the regular bonus, and 500 games after the AT (ART) may be used. Further, the predetermined number of games (for example, the number of ceiling games) may be determined according to what was the normal gaming state before entering the specific gaming state in addition to or instead of the above. For example, there are a plurality of normal states (eg, mode A, mode B, heaven mode, etc.), 500 games after a big bonus entered from mode A or mode B, 128 games after a big bonus entered from heaven mode, etc. It is good.

  In the game display unit, for example, an effect (for example, a mission effect, an event effect, or a battle effect) may be performed before the transition from the normal game state to the specific game state. The presence / absence of the effect and the content of the effect are determined according to, for example, a lottery result at the start of the game or whether a predetermined number of games have been consumed. In addition, in the game display unit, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a plurality of types of identification information (for example, symbols) that can be identified are variably displayed.

  In other words, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a slot machine 1000 as described above, and is a gaming machine that can play a game (for example, the slot machine 1000) as in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the condition ( For example, winning big bonuses, winning regular bonuses, winning ART, etc. (eg, RT, AT, ART, etc.), winning high accuracy status (self-releasing zone), such as ART, and recovering the number of ARTs, etc. (E.g., the winning of the zone), the arrival of the ceiling game (game number cancellation), etc.), the advantageous state for controlling to a predetermined number of advantageous states (e.g., ART state, high accuracy state such as ART). Control means and advantageous state (eg, gaming state such as ART, high probability state such as ART, big bonus gaming state, regular bonus gaming state, recovery of the number of times such as ART) A plurality of notification effects (for example, a game state such as ART, a high-accuracy state such as ART, and a game state where the number of times is recovered such as ART). Notification effect execution means for executing any one of the above, such as an effect for notifying the transition to the gaming state after reaching the ceiling game, etc., and the notification effect execution means is controlled to at least an advantageous state. When a specific condition (e.g., regular bonus winning) is established, the first notification effect (e.g., an effect to notify the bonus failure, ART, etc.) The second notification effect (for example, a regular bonus has been established) for notifying that the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state after the execution of the high-accuracy state or the like is performed. Etc.), and before executing the second notification effect, the ratio of which one of the first notification effects is executed is varied according to the remaining number of advantageous states. It is a gaming machine to play.

  Further, in the above gaming machine, the conditions include a plurality of types (for example, big bonus winning, regular bonus winning, etc.) having different value added (for example, winning balls) obtained after being established, and an advantageous state (for example, , Such as a gaming state such as ART, a highly accurate state such as ART, and a gaming state where the number of times is recovered such as ART, etc. Etc.) may be reset, the remaining number of advantageous states may be reset.

  In the above gaming machine, the notification effect execution means may change the notification effect (first notification effect, second notification effect) of the identification information when the remaining number of advantageous states is smaller than when the advantageous state is large. The rate of execution at a late timing during display may be increased.

  Various contents (including modifications) described in the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can also be applied to the slot machine 1000.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope.

  For example, a game score for use in a game is given using the number of game values having a size specified by the record information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card, and the given game The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine using a score or a game score given by winning a game.

  That is, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area provided in the game area, variable display means is provided for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified and for deriving and displaying the display results. A gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means, but when the gaming score is not zero, The game ball enclosed in the game is driven into the game area, the game is performed, the game score is subtracted according to the game ball being driven, and the game score is awarded according to the game ball winning in the winning area provided in the game area The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that adds the values. Such a gaming machine includes a gaming recording medium insertion slot for inserting a gaming recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of gaming value that can be used to add gaming scores, and a gaming recording You may provide the game recording medium processing means which reads the recording information currently recorded on the game recording medium inserted in the medium insertion port.

  In the above description, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer (the effect control CPU 120) of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, and the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous, 1 is used when the change is started. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted is shown, variation patterns may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) uses the first command before reaching reach, such as presence / absence of a pseudo-ream, presence / absence of a slip effect, etc. Is a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the so-called second stop, and the second command has reached a reach such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of a re-lottery effect. May be configured to transmit a command indicating the variation time and variation mode after the so-called second stop. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. Also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a predetermined time elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by pre-installing the storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 5HL ... 1st start prize memory display area 5HR ... 2nd start prize memory display area 5H ... Start prize Memory display area 6A ... Normal winning ball device 6B ... Normal variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8 ... Speaker 9 ... Lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A ... First start port switch 22B ... Second start port switch 23 ... Count switch 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 100 ... Microcomputer 101, 121 for game control ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
Special state control means for controlling the special state a predetermined number of times based on the establishment of the condition;
A notification effect executing means for executing any one of a plurality of notification effects for notifying whether or not it is controlled to be in an advantageous state;
With
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state having a higher value than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect executing means includes
When controlled in a first preferred state when the remaining number of special state is less than the specified number of times, after performing the first notification effect of notifying that uncontrolled advantageously state, to be controlled advantageously state Execute a second notification effect to notify,
If the second advantageous state is controlled when the remaining number of times of the special state is equal to or greater than the specific number of times, the second notification effect is executed without executing the first notification effect;
A gaming machine, wherein a proportion of which first notification effect is executed before the second notification effect is executed is varied according to the number of remaining special states.

Images